NEC ElectraElite IPK Programming Manual Download Page 422

Page: 422 / 803

Electra Elite IPK

Document Revision 4

Programming Manual

2 - 345

___________________________________________________________________________________

Notes

1-15-13

Centralized Day/Night Switching for Remote Office Assignment

1-15-14

Centralized Day/Night Switching for Main Office Assignment

1-15-15

Centralized BLF Send Point Code Assignment

1-15-16

Centralized BLF Send Extension Number Assignment

1-15-17

Centralized BLF Send Time Assignment

1-15-18

Centralized BLF Display Extension Number Assignment

3-70

CIC Number Assignment

5-05

Common Signaling Channel Route Selection

1-1-05

Start Time Selection

1-5-02

SMDR Print Format

1-5-13

Printer Connected Selection

1-5-14

Printer Line Feed Control Selection

1-5-25

SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment

1-5-26

SMDR Incoming/Outgoing Print Selection

1-8-35

COM Port Baud Rate Setting Assignment

4-56

SMDR Telephone Print Selection

This Memory Block is required for the following K-CCIS features:

Centralized Billing - K-CCIS

Centralized Day/Night Mode Change - K-CCIS

Centralized BLF (K-CCIS)

Assigning a CCH i channel is used for IP (K-CCIS) feature.

Related Programming (Continued)

M.B. Number

Memory Block Name

Summary of Contents for ElectraElite IPK

Page 1: ... may occur causing slight variations When viewing and printing this document we cannot guarantee that your specific PC or printer will support all of the fonts or graphics Therefore when you view the document fonts may be substituted and your individual printer may not have the capability to print the document correctly ...

Page 2: ...PROGRAMMING MANUAL INT 1026 IPK Document Revision 4 Release 4000 4500 ...

Page 3: ......

Page 4: ...approval of NEC Unified Solutions Inc Dterm is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation and Electra Elite is a registered trademark of NEC America Inc Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation AT T is a registered trademark of American Telephone and Telegraph Company Lucent Technologies is a trademark or service mark of Lucent Technologies Inc Nortel Networks and the Nortel Netwo...

Page 5: ......

Page 6: ...N 2 MANUAL ORGANIZATION This manual provides instructions for programming the Electra Elite IPK system Chapter 1 Multiline Terminal Programming This chapter includes the basic information for programming the system Chapter 2 Memory Blocks This chapter includes all of the Memory Blocks used to program the system Detailed programming instructions are provided for each Memory Block Chapter 3 Advanced...

Page 7: ...te IPK System Hardware Manual The System Hardware Manual is intended for the system installer and provides detailed instructions for installing the Electra Elite IPK KSU ETUs Multiline Terminals and optional equipment Electra Electra Elite IPK Least Cost Routing Manual This manual provides instructions to the service technician for programming the customer site for least cost routing Electra Elect...

Page 8: ...nual provides general information about the Electra Electra Elite IPK ACD Plus features installation procedures and feature programming The NEC Electra Electra Elite IPK ACD Plus is an Automatic Call Distribution card that supports up to 40 Agents and 12 supervisors at one time Electra Electra Elite IPK Wireless System Manual This manual describes the system and provides hardware installation and ...

Page 9: ...___________________________________________________________ Document Revision 4 Electra Elite IPK 4 Preface ___________________________________________________________________________________ THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 10: ...1 Check Points 1 4 2 3 2 Preliminary Points 1 4 2 4 Writing System Data 1 5 2 5 Programming Methods 1 6 2 5 1 Initializing the System 1 6 2 5 2 Using the Multiline Terminal for Programming 1 6 2 5 3 Entering Programming Mode 1 8 2 5 4 Page Switching 1 9 2 5 5 Station Port Numbering Plan 1 12 Section 3 System Data List 1 13 Chapter 2 Memory Blocks Section 1 Programming System Data Using the Memory ...

Page 11: ...rward Station Number for Busy Station or Undefined Digit 2 31 1 1 24 PBX CTX Access Code Assignment I 2 33 1 1 25 PBX CTX Access Code Assignment II 2 35 1 1 27 Automatic Day Night Mode Switching Time Assignment 2 37 1 1 28 Distinctive Ringing by Telephone or CO Selection 2 39 1 1 29 Private Line Assignment 2 40 1 1 30 Route Advance Block Assignment 2 41 1 1 32 Automatic Day Night Mode by Day of We...

Page 12: ...e Code Restriction Assignment 2 89 1 1 70 Code Restriction Class Assignment When Lockout is Set 2 90 1 1 71 First Delay Announcement Start Time Selection 2 91 1 1 72 First Delay Announcement Repeat Selection 2 92 1 1 73 First to Second Delay Announcement Interval Time Selection 2 93 1 1 74 Second Delay Announcement Repeat Selection 2 94 1 1 75 Second Delay Announcement Repeat Interval Time Selecti...

Page 13: ...Deny Selection 2 133 1 2 34 Expanded Station Number Assignment 2 135 1 3 01 Bounce Protect Time Selection 2 137 1 3 02 SLT Hookflash Signal Selection 2 138 1 3 03 First Digit PBR Release Time Selection 2 139 1 3 04 Dial 1 DP Hookflash Selection 2 141 1 3 05 Hookflash Start Time Selection 2 142 1 3 06 Hookflash End Time Selection 2 143 1 3 07 Voice Mail Digit Add Assignment 2 144 1 3 08 Voice Mail ...

Page 14: ...nt 2 172 1 4 19 Automated Attendant 1st to 2nd Delay Announcement Interval Time Selection 2 173 1 4 20 Automated Attendant Delay Announcement Disconnect Time Selection 2 174 1 4 21 Automated Attendant Extension Number Assignment 2 175 1 4 22 Automated Attendant Direct Extension Ring Assignment 2 176 1 5 02 SMDR Print Format 2 177 1 5 13 Printer Connected Selection 2 178 1 5 14 Printer Line Feed Co...

Page 15: ...me Selection 2 221 1 8 11 System Refresh Time Assignment 2 223 1 8 12 VRS Message Recording Time Selection 2 224 1 8 13 VRS Message Function Assignment 2 225 1 8 15 Tone Assignment 2 227 1 8 16 Voice Prompt to Tone Assignment 2 230 1 8 17 PC Programming Password Assignment 2 231 1 8 18 Site Name Assignment 2 232 1 8 25 ACD UCD Group Agent Assignment 2 233 1 8 26 Voice Mail Quick Transfer Master Hu...

Page 16: ...ype of Number Assignment 2 267 1 10 03 Call by Call Numbering Plan ID Assignment 2 269 1 10 04 Call by Call Network ID Assignment 2 271 1 10 05 Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment Service 2 273 1 10 06 Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment Feature 2 275 1 10 07 Call by Call Service Parameter Assignment 2 277 1 10 08 Call by Call Max Digit Assignment 2 279 1 10 09 Call by Call Sim...

Page 17: ...Assignment 2 328 1 14 07 ARS Max Digit Assignment 2 330 1 15 00 K CCIS Main Remote Office Selection 2 333 1 15 01 Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignment 2 335 1 15 02 Common Signal Channel Assignment 2 337 1 15 03 Originating Point Code Assignment 2 339 1 15 04 Destination Point Code Assignment 2 341 1 15 05 Destination Point Code Transfer Assignment 2 343 1 15 06 Originating Office Code Numb...

Page 18: ...16 05 Default VLAN ID Tag Insertion Assignment 2 389 1 16 06 Port Based Priority Selection 2 391 1 16 07 High Priority RX Tag Threshold 2 393 1 16 08 High Priority TX Tag Assignment 2 395 1 16 09 Low Priority TX Tag Assignment 2 397 1 16 10 Port Mirroring Selection 2 399 1 16 11 Mirroring Source Port Assignment 2 401 1 16 12 Mirroring Target Port Assignment 2 403 1 16 13 VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assi...

Page 19: ...Detect Time Selection 2 444 3 20 Tie Line Loop Off Guard Time Selection 2 446 3 21 Tie Line Length of Wink Signal Selection 2 448 3 22 Tie Line Length of Delay Signal Selection 2 450 3 24 Tie Line Incoming Interdigit Timeout Selection 2 452 3 25 Tie Line Wink Delay Signal Detect Timeout Selection 2 454 3 27 Tie Line Dial Tone Selection 2 456 3 28 Tie Line Reorder Tone Selection 2 457 3 29 Trunk In...

Page 20: ...election 2 495 3 77 ISDN BRI PRI Directory Number Checking Selection 2 496 3 90 Polarity Reverse Selection 2 498 3 91 Trunk Type Selection 2 499 3 92 Trunk Installed DP DTMF Selection 2 500 4 01 CO PBX Ring Assignment Day Mode 2 501 4 02 CO PBX Ring Assignment Night Mode 2 503 4 03 Doorphone Chime Assignment Day Mode 2 505 4 04 Doorphone Chime Assignment Night Mode 2 507 4 07 Code Restriction Clas...

Page 21: ...APR Ring Mode Assignment 2 549 4 40 LCR Class Selection 2 551 4 41 SIE CAR Ringing Line Preference Selection 2 553 4 42 Call Forward Busy Immediately Delay Selection 2 555 4 43 Station to Call Appearance Block Assignment 2 557 4 44 Caller ID Preset Dial Outgoing CO Selection 2 558 4 46 Live Record Auto Delete Selection 2 559 4 47 ISDN Directory Number Selection 2 560 4 49 Caller ID Display for CAR...

Page 22: ...e Security Assignment 2 598 4 91 Telephone Ringing Variation Selection 2 600 4 92 Receiving Volume Selection 2 602 4 93 Internal Zone Paging Selection 2 603 4 94 3 Minute Alarm Selection 2 605 4 95 DTMF DP SLT Type Selection 2 606 5 00 Digit Add Del for Tie Line Networking Assignment 2 607 5 01 Tie Line Networking Tandem Connection Assignment 2 609 5 02 8 Digit Matching Table to Trunk Group Assign...

Page 23: ...ignments 3 1 1 3 Memory Blocks 3 2 1 4 Memory Block Description 3 3 1 4 1 General 3 3 1 4 2 OCC Assignment Operation 3 3 1 4 3 8 Digit Matching Table Assignment Operation 3 4 1 4 4 System Speed Dial Override by Class Selection Memory Block 1 1 62 3 5 1 4 5 Tie Line Code Restriction Assignment Memory Block 1 1 69 3 5 1 4 6 Code Restriction Class Assignment when Lockout is Set Memory Block 1 1 70 3 ...

Page 24: ... Block 1 8 08 3 16 2 3 3 ARS Allow Deny Selection Memory Block 1 14 00 3 16 2 3 4 ARS Dialing Assignment Memory Block 1 14 01 3 16 2 3 5 ARS Dial Allow Deny Selection Memory Block 1 14 02 3 16 2 3 6 ARS Route Table Number Assignment Memory Block 1 14 03 3 16 2 3 7 ARS Trunk Group to Route Number Assignment Memory Block 1 14 04 3 16 2 3 8 ARS Digit Delete Assignment Memory Block 1 14 05 3 17 2 3 9 ...

Page 25: ... 3 7 ISDN DTMF Duration Interdigit Selection Memory Block 1 1 80 3 34 3 3 8 ISDN K CCIS Interval Time Selection Memory Block 1 1 81 3 34 3 3 9 SLT or Automated Attendant DISA to CPU PBR Selection Memory Block 1 8 01 3 34 3 3 10 PBR Receive Level Assignment for Automated Attendant DISA Memory Block 1 8 02 3 34 3 3 11 Master Clock Selection Memory Block 1 8 33 3 34 3 3 12 Trunk to Tenant Assignment ...

Page 26: ...k 1 13 00 3 37 3 3 31 Call by Call Service Selection Memory Block 1 13 03 3 37 3 3 32 Call by Call Type of Number Assignment Memory Block 1 10 02 3 37 3 3 33 Call by Call Numbering Plan ID Assignment Memory Block 1 10 03 3 37 3 3 34 Call by call Type of Network ID Assignment Memory Block 1 10 00 3 37 3 3 35 Call by Call ID Plan Assignment Memory Block 1 10 01 3 38 3 3 36 Call by Call Network ID As...

Page 27: ...ures Example 3 42 3 7 Dialing Examples 3 44 3 7 1 Dial 9 Trunk access code 1 212 752 5000 3 44 3 7 2 Dial 9 Trunk access code 214 222 5000 3 45 3 7 3 Dial 9 1 333 444 5000 3 46 3 7 4 Dial 9 1 800 777 5000 3 46 3 7 5 Dial 9 1 913 381 6000 3 47 3 7 6 Dial 9 011 81 Country Code 1 471 82 1111 3 47 3 7 7 Outgoing Tie Line Service Detour to Analog Trunk when Simulated Facility Group SFG Busy 3 47 3 7 8 ...

Page 28: ...________________________________________________________________ Appendix A Function Time Chart Section 1 Time Chart A 1 Appendix B Character Codes Section 1 Character Assignment B 1 1 1 Character Code Tables B 1 1 2 Dial Pad Character Assignment B 4 1 2 1 Trunk Name or Number Assignment Example B 4 1 2 2 Enter Speed Dial Name B 5 Appendix C Display Abbreviations ...

Page 29: ...__________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ Document Revision 4 Electra Elite IPK THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 30: ...ramming Flowchart 1 2 Figure 1 2 Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminal 1 6 Figure 1 3 Page Display for 8 Key and 16 Key Multiline Terminals 1 10 Figure 1 4 Page Switching for Data Values 1 11 Figure 3 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS System Data Flow 3 20 Figure 3 2 Quality of Service Configuration 3 55 Figure 3 3 Physical Layout and Default VLAN IDs 3 58 Figure 3 4 VLAN Settings 3 59 Figure 3 5 Por...

Page 31: ...__________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ Document Revision 4 Electra Elite IPK THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 32: ...nal Keys Used for Programming 1 7 Table 2 1 Voice Mail AA Info Settings 2 258 Table 2 2 Card Interface Slot Assignment 2 631 Table 3 1 Automatic Route Selection to Route Number Assignment 3 21 Table 3 2 Route Number to Trunk Group RAB Selection and Digit Control 3 25 Table 3 3 Memory Block Data 3 44 Table A 1 Function Time Chart A 1 Table B 1 System Data Input B 4 Table B 2 Speed Dial Name Input B...

Page 33: ...__________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ Document Revision 4 Electra Elite IPK THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 34: ...are configuration The system stores this information and the default values in the resident system program memory After initially powering up the system a trained technician can change the resident system program to meet the specific needs of an individual customer SECTION 2 PROGRAMMING THE SYSTEM System data programming may be necessary when H the system is installed for the first time H componen...

Page 35: ...gramming can be entered at the same time H Data programmed for one telephone e g Tenant Mode or Telephone Mode can be copied to another telephone Figure 1 1 Programming Flowchart New Installation Installation Test System with Default Values TEST System Data Programming Note 1 Develop System Data Sheet Component Replacement Installation System Data Programming Note 2 Rewrite System Data Sheet Funct...

Page 36: ...y Mode Name Line Key Submode Name LK 1 System Mode LK 1 CO Line LK 2 ICM LK 3 SLT LK 4 Transfer Automated Attendant LK 5 SMDR LCR LK 6 DSS LK 7 ESP LK 8 PBR Miscellaneous LK 9 DISA LK 10 Call by Call LK 11 DTI LK 12 ACD UCD LK 13 PRI LK 14 ARS LK 15 K CCIS LK 16 HUB LK 2 Tenant Mode N A N A LK 3 CO PBX Line Mode N A N A LK 4 Telephone Mode N A N A LK 5 Trunk Group Mode N A N A LK 6 Copy Mode LK 2 ...

Page 37: ...rsion Confirmation or from any idle Display Terminal press A andC H Confirm the Port Number Port numbers are used for system programming Refer to Memory Block 7 1 Card Interface Slot Assignment To confirm station numbers press A andD The display indicates the station number and the port number 2 3 2 Preliminary Points H Select System Programming Refer to Section 2 Programming the System on page 1 ...

Page 38: ...tions or trunks are idle When the data is not written until a station or trunk is idle the station LCD displays DATA ENTRY even after programming is complete to indicate that system data entry is still in progress When the in use stations become idle the data is written and the station LCD displays only the time The data programmed for applicable Memory Blocks is not written for the following cond...

Page 39: ...conds the system operates with the system default values 2 5 2 Using the Multiline Terminal for Programming System programming can be performed using a Display Multiline Terminal that is connected to station port 01 or 02 Figure 1 2 Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminal shows the terminal in the offline mode Figure 1 2 Electra Elite IPK Multiline Terminal Message Waiting LED Help Key Exit Key Flexi...

Page 40: ...the right each timeLis pressed F Used to select another mode Press F to switch modes as follows Mode or submode selection Returns to Program Mode Data No Mode Return to a mode or submode selection or Program Mode if no submode exists D Each time the conference key is pressed Memory Block item changes are as follows Tenant Mode The tenant number increments by one CO PBX Line Mode The CO PBX line nu...

Page 41: ...H DTR 16D 1 TEL H DTU 16D 2 TEL H DTP or DTH DTR 32D 1 TEL H DTU 32D 2 TEL Using the DTH 16LD 1 TEL to program is not recommended To enter programming mode the station must be idle on hook Perform the following procedure to go off line 1 Press A 2 Press H B This key is used to enter a pause hyphen asterisk or pound To enter an asterisk or pound B J B L B A A B B B B C C The Message Waiting LED tur...

Page 42: ... to the Flexible Line keys on the second page The tenant number corresponding to Flexible Line key 1 of the current page is displayed on the right side of the display During system programming a value data is assigned to each Flexible Line key When the number of values exceeds the number of Flexible Line keys value assignments are displayed on additional pages The associated data can be entered on...

Page 43: ...K 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK5 LK6 LK 7 LK 8 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 LK 09 LK 10 LK 11 LK 12 LK 13 LK 14 LK 15 LK 16 09 10 11 12 11 12 15 16 Page 2 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK5 LK6 LK 7 LK 8 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 LK 9 LK 10 LK 11 LK 12 LK 13 LK 14 LK 15 LK 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 LCD Display 01 to indicate Page 1 LCD Display 09 to indicate Page 2 LCD Display 09 to indicate Page 2 8 Key Multiline Terminal DTU D...

Page 44: ...o pages Figure 1 4 Page Switching for Data Values Page 1 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 Data 01 Data 02 Data 03 Data 04 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 Data 05 Data 06 Data 07 Data 08 16 Key Multiline Terminal DTU DTP Page 2 LK 9 LK 10 LK 11 LK 12 Data 09 Data 10 LK 13 LK 14 LK 15 LK 16 LCD Display 01 to indicate Page 1 LCD Display 09 to indicate Page 2 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK5 LK6 LK 7 LK 8 Data 01 Data 02 Data 03 Data ...

Page 45: ...__________ Document Revision 4 Electra Elite IPK 2 5 5 Station Port Numbering Plan Some Memory Blocks require entering a 2 digit port number The Electra Elite IPK system supports 48 120 ports respectively Programming values for entry of Port Assignments are defined below Port Assignments Programming Value 01 99 01 99 100 109 A0 A9 110 119 B0 B9 120 C0 To enter an A B or C press B and 1 2 or 3 ...

Page 46: ... Selection 600ms 20ms 40ms 60ms 80ms 100ms 140ms 160ms 200ms 400ms 600ms 800ms 1 0s 1 5s 2 0s 3 0s 5 0s 03 Hold Recall Time Selection Non Exclusive Hold 25s R2500 or lower 60s R3000 or higher 25s 45s 60s 90s 120s 180s 240s No Limit R2500 or lower 000s No Limit 001s 255s R3000 or higher 04 Automatic Redial Time Selection Table 1 030 Table 2 060 Table 3 002 Table 1 001 050 sec Table 2 001 100 sec Ta...

Page 47: ...sed Number TN Tenant 23 DID Forward Station Number for Busy Station or Undefined Digit NON NON T TEL TN Tenant 24 PBX CTX Access Code Assignment I 9 Up to six digits three numeric three pauses 25 PBX CTX Access Code Assignment II 8 Up to six digits three numeric three pauses 27 Automatic Day Night Mode Switching Time Assignment Not Specified Day Night Mode Time 24 hour clock 28 Distinctive Ringing...

Page 48: ...Route Advance Assignment Not Specified 101 132 Trunk Group 01 32 or 201 216 Route Advance Block 01 16 50 CO PBX Outgoing Digit Add Assignment Not Specified 10 digits max 51 CO Line Ringing Pattern Selection A26 A H NO 52 PBX Line Ringing Pattern Selection B A H NO 53 Tie Line Delay Ring Pattern Selection D A H NO 54 Automated Attendant Transfer Ring Pattern C A H NO 55 DID Line Ringing Pattern Sel...

Page 49: ...le 16 1010XXX N A 68 8 Digit Matching Table to OCC Table Assignment CO PBX Line LED Off Refer to 1 1 68 8 Digit Matching Table to OCC Table Assignment on page 2 88 69 Tie Line Code Restriction Assignment YS NO No Restriction YS Restriction 70 Code Restriction Class Assignment when Lockout is Set 15 Class 00 15 71 First Delay Announcement Start Time Selection 20 In seconds 00 10 20 30 40 50 60 72 F...

Page 50: ...ure Code Service for Code Restriction Not Specified 10 tables each with up to 10 digits 86 Call Monitoring Alert tone Assignment YS YS NO LK 1 System Mode LK 2 ICM Data No Memory Block Name Default Value Programming Values 00 Internal Paging Timeout Selection 90s R2500 or lower 090s R3000 or higher 90s 120s No Limit R2500 or lower 000s No Limit 001s 255s R3000 or higher 01 Intercom Call Voice Tone...

Page 51: ...ned CAR Blocks Port 01 C0 4 ports per block 22 Call Forward No Answer Time Selection 8s R2500 or lower 12s R3000 or higher 4s 8s 12s 18s 24s 30s 60s R2500 or lower 01s 99s R3000 or higher 23 System Call Park Recall Time Selection 1 0 R2500 or lower 060s R3000 or higher In minutes 0 5 1 0 1 5 2 0 3 0 5 0 8 0 10 0 R2500 or lower 001s 999s R3000 or higher 24 Intercom Feature Access Code Assignment Re...

Page 52: ...tect Time Selection 300ms Page 1 0ms 100ms 200ms 300ms 400ms 500ms 600ms 700ms Page 2 800ms 900ms 1000ms 1100ms 1200ms 1300ms 1400ms 1500ms 02 SLT Hookflash Signal Selection HOLD HOLD FLASH 03 First Digit PBR Release Time Selection 10s R2500 or lower 10s R3000 or higher 10s 20s 30s 40s 50s 60s R2500 or lower 01s 99s R3000 or higher 04 Dial 1 DP Hookflash Selection YS YS NO 05 Hookflash Start Time ...

Page 53: ...er Automatic Disconnect Time Selection 060 In minutes 000 999 01 Automated Attendant First Digit PBR Release Time Selection 20s R2500 or lower 20s R3000 or higher 5s 10s 20s 30s 40s 50s 60s R2500 or lower 01s 99s R3000 or higher 02 Automated Attendant Transfer Delayed Ringing Time Selection R2500 or lower 00s R3000 or higher In seconds 10 20 30 No Limit R2500 or lower 00s No Limit 01 99s R3000 or ...

Page 54: ...t on page 2 166 16 Automated Attendant Message Repeat Selection 1 All messages 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 17 Automated Attendant Delay Announcement Hold Tone Selection RBT RBT MOH 18 Automated Attendant Delay Announcement Assignment NONE Not specified None MSG1 MSG2 MSG3 MSG4 MSG5 MSG6 MSG7 MSG8 19 Automated Attendant 1st to 2nd Delay Announcement Interval Time Selection 4m 0s 10s 20s 30s 1m 2m 3m 4m 5m 10m ...

Page 55: ... YS NO 25 SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment 040s 000 990s in 10 second increments 26 SMDR Incoming Outgoing Print Selection OUT ALL OUT INC LK 1 System Mode LK 6 DSS Data No Memory Block Name Default Value Programming Values 01 Attendant Add On Console to Telephone Port Assignment Refer to 1 6 01 Attendant Add On Console to Telephone Port Assignment on page 2 183 03 DSS Call Voice Tone Signal Select...

Page 56: ... Selection All Speakers A C On ESP A ESP B ESP C 03 External Paging Alert Tone Selection YS YS NO 04 Doorphone Ring Pattern Selection DPH1 4 ON OFF ON A H 05 Doorphone Ringing Frequency Selection C A H 06 External Paging Timeout Selection 5 0 R2500 or lower 300s R3000 or higher In minutes 0 5 1 0 1 5 2 0 3 0 5 0 8 0 No Limit R2500 or lower 000s No Limit 001s 999s R3000 or higher 07 External Ring R...

Page 57: ... 07 Class of Service Attendant Feature Selection 1 on page 2 211 08 Class of Service Station Feature Selection 2 Refer to 1 8 08 Class of Service Station Feature Selection 2 on page 2 214 09 Music on Hold Pattern Selection A Medley A or B 10 PBR Interdigit Release Time Selection 7s 3s 4s 5s 6s 7s 8s 9s 10s 11 System Refresh Time Assignment 4H NON 4H 8H 12H 24H 12 VRS Message Recording Time Selecti...

Page 58: ...XT 32 Hold Internal Tone Volume Selection 0dB 0dB 6dB 33 Master Clock Selection Cabinet 0 Master System Cabinet 0 1 3 Slot 1 8 35 COM Port Baud Rate Setting Assignment COM 1 38 4 COM 2 4 8 COM 3 9 6 4 8 Kbps 9 6 Kbps 19 2 Kbps 38 4 Kbps 36 COM Port Parity Stop Bit Setting Assignment NON 1 NON 1 NON 2 EVEN 1 ODD 1 37 General Purpose Relay Assignment NO NO YS 38 Modem Number for Remote Programming A...

Page 59: ...ng Digit Assignment 911 1 11 911 9911 47 Call Arrival Key Voice Mail Message Notification Assignment Not Specified 2 digit 10 89 3 digit 100 899 or 4 digit 1000 8999 CARs 48 Automatic Daylight Saving Time Selection YS YS NO 49 New AA Info Yes No Selection YS YS NO LK 1 System Mode LK 8 PBR Miscellaneous Continued Data No Memory Block Name Default Value Programming Values LK 1 System Mode LK 9 DISA...

Page 60: ...r Assignment All RABs 0 0 Unknown 1 International 2 National 3 Network Specific 4 Subscriber or Local 5 7 Not Used 03 Call by Call Numbering Plan ID Assignment All RABs 00 00 Unknown 01 ISDN Telephony Numbering Plan 02 Not Used 3 Future Data Numbering Plan 04 08 Not Used 09 Private Numbering Plan 10 15 Not Used 04 Call by Call Network ID Assignment All RABs Unspecified Three or four digit Call by ...

Page 61: ...nt All RABs 0 000 0 0 or 1 000 000 127 08 Call by Call Max Digit Assignment All RABs 00 00 No Limit 24 09 Call by Call Simulated Facility Group Assignment All RABs 00 00 None 16 20 Call by Call Outgoing SFG Assignment 99 01 16 For Electra Elite 48 Default 16 01 64For Electra Elite192 Default 64 99 Default for all SFGs 21 Call by Call Outgoing Incoming SFG Assignment 99 01 16 For Electra Elite 48 D...

Page 62: ...on 1 Refer to 1 11 02 Line Length Selection on page 2 291 03 IP K CCIS Selection NO YS NO 05 T1 Channel Selection Refer to 1 11 05 T1 Channel Selection on page 2 294 06 Signaling Selection LS LS GS 07 DTI Trunk Type Assignment CO CO E M DID ANI 08 Digits Delete for T1 ANI Assignment 2DGT 0 No delete 1 9 LK 1 System Mode LK 12 ACD UCD Data No Memory Block Name Default Value Programming Values 00 AC...

Page 63: ... 04 PRT B Channel Outgoing Priority Selection H L H L L H 05 PRT B Channel to Trunk Group Assignment 00 Any Trunk Group 00 01 32 Trunk Groups LK 1 System Mode LK 14 ARS Data No Memory Block Name Default Value Programming Values 00 ARS Allow Deny Selection NO NO YES 01 ARS Dialing Assignment None Tables 1 4 02 ARS Dial Allow Deny Selection YES YES NO 03 ARS Route Table Number Assignment 00 Table 1 ...

Page 64: ...r Assignment Blank Point Code Range 00001 16367 T001 T255 can be assigned 06 Originating Office code Number Assignment Blank Valid Range 0 99999 07 K CCIS Message Response Timeout Assignment 30 sec Valid Times 01 99 Seconds 08 Link Reconnect Allow Deny Selection YS NO YS 09 K CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Assignment 5 1 7 10 Calling Name display Allow Deny Selection NO NO YS 11 Centralized Bill...

Page 65: ...eny Selection NO Deny NO Deny YS Allow 20 Centralized 911 Originating Number Selection STA Station No STA Station No CESID CES ID 21 Centralized 911 Look Ahead Routing Allow Deny Selection NO Deny NO Deny YS Allow LK 1 System Mode LK 15 K CCIS Continued Data No Memory Block Name Default Value Programming Values LK 1 System Mode LK 16 HUB Data No Memory Block Name Default Value Programming Values 0...

Page 66: ...NO YS 15 VLAN Tag Insertion Selection NO NO YS 16 Flow Control for Full Duplex Selection NO NO YS 17 Back Pressure for Half Duplex NO NO YS LK 1 System Mode LK 16 HUB Continued Data No Memory Block Name Default Value Programming Values LK 2 Tenant Mode Data No Memory Block Name Default Value Programming Values 01 Trunk to Tenant Assignment Refer to 2 01 Trunk to Tenant Assignment on page 2 415 05 ...

Page 67: ...e Selection NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN TANDM TRF AA 06 Automatic Tandem Trunk Assignment Not Specified CO 01 64 07 CO PBX Ringing Variation Selection M M L H 11 CO External Source Selection CO CO EXT SOURCE 12 Trunk to MOH Trunk Assignment 00 01 64 CO PBX 14 Tie Line Type Assignment 2ND DIAL 2ND DIAL IMMEDIATE DELAY WINK 15 Trunk DTMF Duration Interdigit Selection 110 80 Duration Interdigit Time in milli...

Page 68: ... 2700 3000 3300 3600 3900 4200 4500 24 Tie Line Incoming Interdigit Timeout Selection 6s 1s 2s 3s 4s 5s 6s 7s 8s 9s 10s 11s 12s 13s 14s 15s No Limit 25 Tie Line Wink Delay Signal Detect Timeout Selection 7s 1s 2s 3s 4s 5s 6s 7s 8s 9s 10s 11s 12s 13s 14s 15s No Limit 27 Tie Line Dial Tone Selection YS YS NO 28 Tie Line Reorder Tone Selection YS YS Send NO Do Not Send 29 Trunk Internal Transmit Pad ...

Page 69: ...No Live Recording YS Live Recording 50 ISDN Line SPID Assignment Not Specified Up to 20 digits 52 ISDN Trunk Directory Number Assignment Not Specified Up to 20 digits 53 Caller Name Indication Selection NUM NO NUM NAM TRK 59 Automated Attendant Function Selection NORMAL NORMAL DELAY 61 DIT ANA Delay Answer Time Selection 0s R2500 or lower 00s R3000 or higher 0s 5s 10s 20s 30s 40s 50s 60s R2500 or ...

Page 70: ...e Default Value Programming Values 01 CO PBX Ring Assignment Day Mode Refer to 4 01 CO PBX Ring Assignment Day Mode on page 2 501 No Ring Immediate Ring Delayed Ring 02 CO PBX Ring Assignment Night Mode Refer to 4 02 CO PBX Ring Assignment Night Mode on page 2 503 No Ring Immediate Ring Delayed Ring 03 Doorphone Chime Assignment DayMode Station Port 01 and 02 Chime for All Four Doorphones DPH1 DPH...

Page 71: ...er Forward Assignment No Telephones Specified Station Number 2 7 digits 17 Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment 00 Refer to 4 17 Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment on page 2 526 18 Station Name Assignment Not Specified Up to six digits characters R3500 or lower Up to 16 digits characters R4000 R4500 or higher 19 Trunk Outgoing Restriction LEDs Off Off Not Restricted On Restri...

Page 72: ... 39 APR Ring Mode Assignment STA NON STA ALL 40 LCR Class Selection 0 Class 0 4 41 SIE CAR Ringing Line Preference Selection YS NO YS 42 Call Forward Busy Immediately Delay Selection YS NO YS 43 Station to Call Appearance Block Assignment All Stations Assigned Call Appearance Block 00 Call Appearance Block 00 47 44 Caller ID Preset Dial Outgoing CO Selection Not Specified N A 46 Live Record Auto D...

Page 73: ...Directory Number Selection None Calling Party Number CPN 64 Code Restriction Class without Authorization Code Day Mode Assignment All Stations Class 15 Setting Data 00 15 65 Code Restriction Class without Authorization Code Night Mode Assignment All Stations Class 15 Setting Data 00 15 66 MOH or Ring Back Tone Selection MOH MOH RBT 67 IP Station Number Assignment Blank 10 89 100 899 1000 8999 68 L...

Page 74: ...ode Data No Memory Block Name Default Value Programming Values 00 Digit Add Del for Tie Line Networking Assignment 000 No Add or Delete Delete up to two digits Add up to two digits 01 Tie Line Networking Tandem Connection Assignment All Trunk Groups CO PBX Line LEDs On On Enable Off Disable 02 8 Digit Matching Table to Trunk Group Assignment Enabled CO PBX Line LEDs On On Enable Off Disable 03 OCC...

Page 75: ...__________________________________________________________________ Document Revision 4 Electra Elite IPK LK 6 Copy Mode Data No Memory Block Name Default Value Programming Values 2 Tenant Mode Copy Assignment N A N A 3 CO Line Mode Copy Assignment N A N A 4 Telephone Mode Copy Assignment N A N A 5 Trunk Group Mode Copy Assignment N A N A ...

Page 76: ...on page 2 627 2 Telephone Type Assignment TEL NON TEL DSS CONSOL SLT ADP DIGITAL VM MSG BOARD 3 00 MIF ACD Assignment 00 No Assignment N A 3 01 MIF LCR Assignment 00 No Assignment N A 3 02 MIF SMDR Assignment 00 No Assignment N A 3 03 MIF UCD Assignment 00 No Assignment N A 3 04 MIF Caller ID Assignment 00 No Function N A LK 8 Special Mode Data No Memory Block Name Default Value Programming Values...

Page 77: ...__________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ Document Revision 4 Electra Elite IPK THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 78: ...lock the following information is provided H General Description is a brief explanation of the function of the Memory Block H Display indicates the default information displayed in the Multiline Terminal LCD during programming H Settings when applicable indicates the information that is entered using the line keys on the Multiline Terminal H Programming Procedures contains detailed procedures to p...

Page 79: ...e data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 1 09 Manual Pause Selection 1 1 24 PBX CTX Access Code Assignment I 1 1 25 PBX CTX Access Code Assignment II 3 91 Trunk Type Selection 1 A pause is automatically inserted following a CO PBX Access Code e g 9 by programming CO PBX lines as PBX in ...

Page 80: ...es 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK1 KAto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 3 92 Trunk Installed DP DTMF Selection Use this Memory Block when DP Tie lines or DID are assigne...

Page 81: ...is assigned Display Settings Page 1 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default 20ms 40ms 60ms 80ms 100ms 140ms 160ms 200ms Page 2 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 400ms 600ms 800ms 1 0s 1 5s 2 0s 3 0s 5 0s Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK1 KBto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option Use ...

Page 82: ...emory Block Name 1 1 46 Access Code 1 Digit Assignment 1 1 47 Access Code 2 Digit Assignment 1 3 02 SLT Hookflash Signal Selection 4 24 SLT Hookflash Assignment 1 A 1 or 2 digit Access Code can be assigned in Memory Block 1 1 46 47 Access Code 1 or 2 Digit Assignment for Single Line Telephones to send a hookflash signal on a CO PBX line default 6 2 A hookflash from a Single Line Telephone puts an ...

Page 83: ...is Memory Block can be adjusted in 1 second intervals R3000 or higher Display R2500 or lower Settings Refer to the next page for R3000 or higher Programming Procedures LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default 25s 45s 60s 90s 120s 180s 240s No Limit Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK1 KCto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX l...

Page 84: ...63 Hold Recall Time Selection Exclusive 1 2 23 System Call Park Recall Time Selection 4 71 Station to Timer Class of Service R3000 or higher 1 Calls put on Exclusive Hold recall using the data selected in Memory Block 1 1 63 Hold Recall Time Selection Exclusive 2 Calls placed on hold on Call Appearance keys recall using this Memory Block 3 Calls parked in System Call Park locations recall using Me...

Page 85: ...Waiting Time 001 100 sec Table 3 Call Attempts 001 015 times 000 cannot be entered 4 Press G to write the data and display the next table 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each remaining table After pressing G for Table 3 the next Memory Block is displayed 6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line 1 Definitions Calling Time The time that the system automatically calls the busy CO PBX ...

Page 86: ...an be adjusted in 1 second intervals R3000 or higher Display R2500 or lower Settings Refer to the next page for R3000 or higher Programming Procedures LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default 10s 20s 30s 40s 50s 60s 70s 2s Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK1 KEto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data...

Page 87: ...ice R3000 or higher 1 This time is used for the features with functions described below Elapsed Call Time The time after dialing before the Elapsed Call Time is started and displayed on a Multiline Terminal SMDR Start Time The time needed after dialing before the SMDR Valid Call Time is started Refer to Memory Block 1 5 25 SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment For outgoing calls both Elapsed Call Time a...

Page 88: ... ringing tone does not change This Memory Block can be adjusted in 1 second intervals R3000 or higher Display R2500 or lower Settings Refer to the next page for R3000 or higher Programming Procedures LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default 10s 20s 30s No Limit Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK1 KFto access the Memory Block 3 Press the correspon...

Page 89: ...riation Selection 4 01 CO PBX Ring Assignment Day Mode 4 02 CO PBX Ring Assignment Night Mode 4 91 Telephone Ringing Variation Selection 1 Memory Blocks 4 01 and 4 02 CO PBX Ring Assignment Day Mode Night Mode must be set to ring 2 CO PBX lines assigned for DIT ANA do not activate this feature 3 Tie DID lines assigned for Delayed Ringing follow this assignment after the delayed ringing starts 4 Th...

Page 90: ...nt defines the preassigned station This Memory Block can be adjusted in 1 second intervals R3000 or higher Display R2500 or lower Settings Refer to the next page for R3000 or higher Programming Procedures LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default 10s 20s 30s No Limit Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK1 KGto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corr...

Page 91: ...ss 1 Setting Data 000s 255s e g 020s 20s Default Values Class 1 4 000s 000s No Limit 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Timer Class of Service 5 Program the next Timer Class of Service or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 1 34 Tie Line First Ring Pattern Selection 4 01 CO PBX Ring Assignment Day Mode 4 02 CO PBX Ring Assignment Night Mode 4...

Page 92: ...ng Any station A B or C user can press the flashing line key to answer the call 4 After the timeout the system uses the Day and Night Ringing Assignment and rings the assigned station 5 Select No Limit to disable this feature 6 Telephone ports 1 and 2 are in Station to Timer Class of Service Class 1 by default All other ports are in Station to Timer Class of Service Class 2 by default R3000 or hig...

Page 93: ...er one or more digits of a dialed number are entered Display Settings LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default NO YS Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK1 KIto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or p...

Page 94: ...ory Block set to NO the system interprets the sequence as 9074000XXX345 XXX B and 12 is interpreted as Speed Dial buffer 12 2 When a user seizes a CO PBX line and dials 907 4000 B 12345 with this Memory Block set to YS the system interprets the sequence as 9074000XXX12345 XXX is interpreted as a pause 3 The pause is inserted when Last Number Redial Save and Repeat or Store and Repeat is used to re...

Page 95: ... LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default NO YS Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK1 AAto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 1 ...

Page 96: ...not answered This Memory Block can be adjusted in 1 second intervals R3000 or higher Display R2500 or lower Settings Refer to the next page for R3000 or higher Programming Procedures LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default 25s 45s 60s 90s 120s 180s 240s No Limit Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK1 ABto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresp...

Page 97: ...the next Timer Class of Service or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 1 11 System Transfer Camp On Selection 1 6 01 Attendant Add On Console to Telephone Port Assignment 1 8 08 Class of Service Station Feature Selection 2 4 71 Station to Timer Class of Service R3000 or higher 1 Telephone ports 1 and 2 are in Station to Timer Class of Service Class 1 by de...

Page 98: ...E F Page 2 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 G H Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK1 ACto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option Use the following to enter data C to access the next page A to access the previous page 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to...

Page 99: ..._______________________________________________________________________________ Document Revision 4 Electra Elite IPK The Ring Patterns are shown in the table below s seconds Pattern Line Key Tone Off LK 1 Tone On LK 2 A LK 3 B LK 4 C LK 5 D LK 6 E LK 7 F LK 8 G LK 1 Pg 2 H LK 2 Pg 2 4s 1s 6s 0s 2s 3s 5s 2s ...

Page 100: ...ADto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option The available tones are 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 1 11 System Transfer Camp On Selection 1 1 13 CO Transfer Ring Pattern Selection System Mode 1 Submode 1...

Page 101: ... the line keys listed in the table to the left None are restricted 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 Page 2 Tenants 08 15 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 Page 3 Tenants 16 23 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Page 4 Tenants 24 31 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Page 5 Tenants 32 39 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK ...

Page 102: ...ll pages for the selected buffer and press G to write the data and display the next Speed Dial Buffer No 5 After entering data for the last Speed Dial Buffer No press G to write that data and the next Memory Block is displayed 6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 1 33 Speed Dial Number Name Display Selection 1 1 35 Speed D...

Page 103: ...mory Block to assign which tenants use each group 3 When speed dial is set to 1000 900 999 cannot be restricted 4 The X in each Speed Dial Buffer No is displayed even when it is not entered 5 Tenant numbers 00 07 are assigned to Flexible Line keys on the first page Tenant numbers 08 15 are assigned to the Flexible Line keys on the second page The tenant number corresponding to Flexible Line key 1 ...

Page 104: ...ck 3 Enter the data using the dial pad Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data H to clear all data Default Values 3 Setting Data 2 3 or 4 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 1 21 DID Digit Conv...

Page 105: ...ss LK1 LK1 BAto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option Default Values NO 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 1 20 DID Digit Length Selection 1 1 22 DID Digit Conversion Table 1 1 23 DID Forward Station Number...

Page 106: ...assigned T Station or Closed Number TN Tenant Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK1 BBto access the Memory Block 3 Press Line Key to select Station or closed number or tenant Enter the data using the dial pad Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or name Refer to Appendix B Character Codes Section 1 Character Assi...

Page 107: ...ffective Digit Selection 1 1 21 DID Digit Conversion Assignment 1 1 23 DID Forward Station Number for Busy Station or Undefined Digit 5 00 Digit Add Del For Tie Line Networking Assignment 1 When Memory Block 5 00 is used to add or delete digits on a trunk group this Memory Block is used to route the digits after the add or delete 2 When converting a DID number to a Tenant the following must be ass...

Page 108: ... is the default NON T TEL TN Tenant Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK1 BCto access the Memory Block 3 Enter Setting Data 1 using the Line key Enter Setting Data 2 using the dial pad Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data TEL is 2 3 or 4 digit number 10 89 100 899 or 1000 8999 Tenant number can be 00 47 Default V...

Page 109: ...______________________________________________ Document Revision 4 Electra Elite IPK Notes When this Memory Block is set to a Tenant the following must be assigned to ring the desired station Memory Block 4 01 CO PBX Ring Assignment Day Mode Memory Block 4 02 CO PBX Ring Assignment Night Mode Memory Block 4 09 Telephone to Tenant Assignment ...

Page 110: ...y Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK1 BDto access the Memory Block 3 Enter the data using the dial pad Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data B to insert a pause H to clear all data Default Values 9 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back...

Page 111: ...do not operate properly unless a PBX CTX Access Code is specified This limitation applies to PBX lines assigned in Memory Block 3 91 Trunk Type Selection 2 A pause is not inserted in the number of an outgoing call on a CO line 3 Up to three numeric characters and three pauses can be specified 4 A pause cannot be inserted as the first digit or as consecutive digits 5 The entry for pause is Example ...

Page 112: ...mming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK1 BEto access the Memory Block 3 Enter the option using the dial pad Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data B to insert a pause cannot be first digit H to clear all data Default Values 8 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or pr...

Page 113: ... Restriction do not operate properly unless a PBX CTX Access Code is specified This limitation only applies to PBX lines assigned in Memory Block 3 91 Trunk Type Selection 2 A pause is not inserted in the number of an outgoing call on a CO line 3 Up to three numeric characters and three pauses can be specified 4 A pause cannot be inserted as the first or as consecutive digits Example Elite IPK Sys...

Page 114: ...ata H to clear all data when the cursor is in the Data No position Default Values Not Specified 4 Press G to write the data The switching time for pattern 2 is displayed 5 Use the dial pad to change the time 6 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 7 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 1 32 Automatic Da...

Page 115: ...ime for Day Mode only or Night Mode only cannot be programmed 3 Day Mode and Night Mode cannot be programmed for the same start time 4 The time is entered using 24 hour clock only 5 The first time input indicates when Day Mode starts The second time input indicates when Night Mode starts 6 Refer to Memory Block 1 1 32 Automatic Day Night Mode by Day of Week Selection for selecting either Pattern 1...

Page 116: ... the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 3 07 CO PBX Ringing Variation Selection 4 01 CO PBX Ring Assignment Day Mode 4 02 CO PBX Ring Assignment Night Mode 4 91 Telephone Ringing Va...

Page 117: ... is displayed Move the cursor to change the data 5 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 2 06 Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode 4 12 Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode 1 Two private lines can be assigned to one station or one private line can be assigned to two s...

Page 118: ...ck and Priority number are displayed Use the dial pad to enter the Trunk Group Number and press G Use the dial pad to select Block Number Priority Number and Trunk Group in sequence and press G after Block 32 to display the next Memory Block Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data Block Numbers Default Values All Blocks 00 4 Progr...

Page 119: ...ne key is pressed or an Access Code is dialed the system starts searching for an idle line in a specified group beginning with the Trunk group assigned priority 1 3 When all CO PBX lines are in use the line with the next highest priority is seized 4 Route Advance Block Number Access Codes are defined in Memory Block 1 1 46 Access Code 1 Digit Assignment or Memory Block 1 1 47 Access Code 2 Digit A...

Page 120: ...e and Night Mode Display Settings LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 Default not assigned Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK1 CBto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option Each time a CO PBX line is pressed the LED indication changes from Pattern 1 to Pattern 2 Default Values Sunday Saturday Patter...

Page 121: ...ature Selection 1 1 8 48 Automatic Daylight Saving Time Selection 4 09 Telephone to Tenant Assignment 4 17 Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment 1 By designating two time settings in Memory Block 1 1 27 Automatic Day Night Mode Switching Time Assignment one of the two settings can be assigned to each day of the week 2 To specify Day Night Mode automatic switching time for Monday Friday an...

Page 122: ...shaded selection is the default DIAL NAME Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK1 CCto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 1 18 System Speed Dial Restrictio...

Page 123: ...OICE Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK1 CDto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 1 07 Tie Line Delay Ringing Time Selection 1 1 53 Tie Line Delay Ring ...

Page 124: ...__________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ Ringing Pattern Selection s seconds Pattern 1 2 3 4 5 Same as Internal Ring 6 Voice Announce 6s 0s 1s 2s 3s 4s 5s ...

Page 125: ...es 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK1 CEto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 1 18 System Speed Dial Restriction by Tenant 1 1 33 Speed Dial Number Name Display Selection 1 ...

Page 126: ...e adjusted in 1 second intervals R3000 or higher Display R2500 or lower Settings Refer to the next page for R3000 or higher Programming Procedures LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default 10s 20s 30s 60s Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK1 CGto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option 4 Press G t...

Page 127: ... of Service or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 4 71 Station to Timer Class of Service R3000 or higher 1 When all trunks in a particular Trunk group are busy the station user can dial an Access Code to queue on the busy Trunk group When a Trunk in that group becomes idle the queued station is signaled 2 Telephone ports 1 and 2 are in Station to Timer Clas...

Page 128: ... numeric data 4 Enter the Function Number for the Dial Number Refer to the table on the following pages for a complete list 5 Press G to write the data and display the next Dial No 6 Program each Dial No and press G after the last Dial No to display the next Memory Block 7 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 1 47 Access Cod...

Page 129: ...to each selected function H When a function is assigned a 1 digit Access Code 2 digit Access Codes with the same first digit become invalid i e if a function is assigned to Access Code 5 Access Codes 50 59 5 and 5 cannot be used 2 To enter or as part of an Access Code press B then Lor J 3 This Memory Block is used when a 2 or 3 Digit Station Numbering Plan is programmed 4 When function 001 Station...

Page 130: ... Hookflash 028 Not Used 029 Not Used 41 030 Call Forward All Call Set 40 031 DND Set 42 032 Call Forward All Call DND Cancel 033 Call Forward All Call Set from Destination Default Dial No Function No Function Name 034 Call Forward All Call Cancel from Destination 035 Station Outgoing Lockout Set 036 Station Outgoing Lockout Cancel 037 Change Password 038 Reset Password from Attendant 039 Fax Statu...

Page 131: ...ookflash 028 Not Used 029 Not Used 41 030 Call Forward All Call Set 40 031 DND Set 42 032 Call Forward All Call DND Cancel 033 Call Forward All Call Set from Destination Default Dial No Function No Function Name 034 Call Forward All Call Cancel from Destination 035 Station Outgoing Lockout Set 036 Station Outgoing Lockout Cancel 037 Change Password 038 Reset Password from Attendant 039 Fax Status ...

Page 132: ...in Same Tenant 067 Call Pickup Tie only in Same Tenant 068 Call Pickup PBX only in Same Tenant 069 Call Pickup CO only in Same Tenant 51 070 All Internal Zone Paging 52 071 Internal Zone A Paging 53 072 Internal Zone B Paging 54 073 Internal Zone C Paging 5 074 Internal External Meet Me Default Dial No Function No Function Name 55 075 All External Zone Paging 56 076 External Zone A Paging 57 077 E...

Page 133: ...d No Answer Split Cancel 152 Call Forward Busy Split Set 153 Call Forward Busy Split Cancel 154 Call Forward Busy No Answer Split Set Default Dial No Function No Function Name 155 Call Forward Busy No Answer Split Cancel 156 Call Forward All Split Set 157 Call Forward All Split Cancel 158 Call Forward Busy No Answer Split Set for Call Arrival Key CAR 159 Call Forward Busy No Answer Split Cancel fo...

Page 134: ...ce Block 01 32 233 250 Not Used 251 DISA Password Set Any station 252 DISA Password Reset Attendant only 253 DISA Password Confirmation Attendant only 254 Not Used 255 Not Used 301 Third Digit Table Number 01 2 digit Numbering Plan can only be entered 304 Third Digit Table Number 04 2 digit Numbering Plan can only be entered Default Dial No Function No Function Name 401 Closed Number Block 1 416 C...

Page 135: ...ad Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data 4 Enter the Function Number for the Dial Number Refer to the table in Memory Block 1 1 46 Access Code 1 Digit Assignment 5 Press G to display next dial number in succession 6 After programming last Dial No press G to display the next Memory Block 7 Program the next Memory Block or press E...

Page 136: ...0 99 or to each selected function H When a function is assigned a 1 digit Access Code 2 digit Access Codes with the same first digit become invalid i e if a function is assigned to Access Code 5 Access Codes 50 59 5 and 5 cannot be used 2 To enter or as part of an Access Code press B then Lor J 3 Use this Memory Block when a 4 Digit Station Numbering Plan is programmed 4 When function 001 Station ...

Page 137: ... B andJto enter B andLto enter Default Values All Dial 000 Not Used 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Dial No 5 After last Dial No entry press G to write the data and display Third Digit Table No 02 Dial No 0 6 Enter Function No for Dial No 0 and press G to write the data and display the next Dial No 7 After last Dial No entry for Table 02 press G to write the data and display Third...

Page 138: ...___________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 1 46 Access Code 1 Digit Assignment 1 1 47 Access Code 2 Digit Assignment 1 2 03 2 7 Digit Station Number Selection 1 2 34 Expanded Station Number Assignment ...

Page 139: ...7 Access Code 2 Digit Assignment to assign function 301 to 81 H Set Third Digit Table No 01 dial number 1 to function 102 7 By assigning Memory Blocks 1 2 03 1 2 34 1 1 47 and 1 1 48 as shown below Stations can be assigned by the 10s group for 4 digit station numbers 100s group for 5 digit station numbers 1000s group for 6 digit station numbers or 10000s group for 7 digit station numbers System So...

Page 140: ...47 Access Code 2 Digit Assignment AC20 301 Digit Table 01 MB 1 1 48 Access Code 3 Digit Assignment Table 01 Dial 0 001 Station Number Station Numbers are 2000000 2009999 200XXXX 8 When function 001 Station Number is assigned in this memory block it cannot be assigned in Memory Block 1 1 46 Access Code 1 Digit Assignment or Memory Block 1 1 47 Access Code 2 Digit Assignment Dial No Function Number ...

Page 141: ... Block Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data H to clear all data Default Values Not Specified 4 Press G to write selected data and display the next Closed Number Block 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each Closed Number Block After data for the last Closed Number Block is written the next Memory Block is displayed 6 Program the next M...

Page 142: ...ock 3 Use dial pad to enter digits to be added for Closed Number Block 01 Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data H to clear all data B Jto enter B Lto enter Default Values Not Specified 4 Press G to write selected data and display the next Closed Number Block 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each Closed Number Block After data for the ...

Page 143: ... Block 1 1 46 Access Code 1 Digit assignment Assignment 2 401 Closed Number Block 01 2 Memory Block 1 1 49 Networking Trunk Group Route Advance Assignment Assignment Block 01 102 Trunk group 02 3 Memory Block 1 1 50 CO PBX Outgoing Digit Add Assignment Assignment Block 01 Assign 2 4 Digits are added when the Access Code is dialed from the internal dial tone 5 This Memory Block also applies to ISDN...

Page 144: ... shaded selection is the default A B C D E F G H LK 9 LK 10 LK 11 LK 12 LK 13 LK 14 LK 15 LK 16 NO Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK1 EAto access the Memory Block 3 Press corresponding CO PBX line key to change data Use the following to enter data C to access the next page A to access the previous page 4 Press G to write data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next M...

Page 145: ...__________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ Document Revision 4 Electra Elite IPK The Ring Patterns are shown in the table below s seconds Pattern A B C D E F G H NO No Ring 0s 1s 2s 3s 4s 5s 6s ...

Page 146: ...election is the default A B C D E F G H Page 2 LK 9 LK 10 LK 11 LK 12 LK 13 LK 14 LK 15 LK 16 NO Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK1 EBto access the Memory Block 3 Press corresponding CO PBX line key to change data Use the following to enter data C to access the next page A to access the previous page 4 Press G to write data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Mem...

Page 147: ...__________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ Document Revision 4 Electra Elite IPK The Ring Patterns are listed in the table below s seconds Pattern A B C D E F G H NO No Ring 0s 1s 2s 3s 4s 5s 6s ...

Page 148: ...Selection Settings Page 1 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default A B C D E F G H Page 2 LK 9 LK 10 LK 11 LK 12 LK 13 LK 14 LK 15 LK 16 NO Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK1 ECto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option Use the following to enter data C to access the next page A to access the p...

Page 149: ...___________ Document Revision 4 Electra Elite IPK The Ring Patterns are shown in the table below Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 1 07 Tie Line Delay Ringing Time Selection 1 1 34 Tie Line First Ring Pattern Selection 4 01 CO PBX Ring Assignment Day Mode 4 02 CO PBX Ring Assignment Night Mode s seconds Pattern A B C D E F G H NO No Ring 0s 1s 2s 3s 4s 5s 6s ...

Page 150: ... to individual features in the Electra Elite IPK Features and Specifications Manual LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default A B C D E F G H Page 2 LK 9 LK 10 LK 11 LK 12 LK 13 LK 14 LK 15 LK 16 NO Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK1 EDto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option Use the following...

Page 151: ...__________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ Document Revision 4 Electra Elite IPK The Ring Patterns are shown in the table below s seconds Pattern A B C D E F G H NO No Ring 0s 1s 2s 3s 4s 5s 6s ...

Page 152: ...age 2 LK 9 LK 10 LK 11 LK 12 LK 13 LK 14 LK 15 LK 16 NO Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK1 EEto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option Use the following to change page C to move to next page A to move to previous page 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go ...

Page 153: ...K 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default NON 1s 2s 3s 4s 5s 6s 7s Page 2 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 8s 9s 10s 11s 12s 13s Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK1 EGto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option Use the following to change page C to move to next page A to move to previous page 4 Press ...

Page 154: ...the default YS NO Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK1 EIto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 1 51 CO Line Ringing Pattern Selection 1 1 52 PBX Line Ri...

Page 155: ... is no match the system allows free dialing or denies dialing by disconnecting Refer to Memory Block 1 1 65 Code Restriction Class Allow Deny Selection for programming Display Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK1 FKto access the Memory Block 3 Use the dial pad to enter the data for Dial Code 00 for 8 Digit Matching Table 00 Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left L...

Page 156: ...r all Dial Codes for 8 Digit Matching Table 00 are entered press G again to display 8 Digit Matching Table 01 6 Repeat Steps 3 and 5 to cycle through all Dial Codes for all 8 Digit Matching Tables After the last Dial Code for the last 8 Digit Matching Table is entered the next Memory Block is displayed 7 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line 1 There are 16 8 Digit Matching Ta...

Page 157: ... shaded selection is the default NON YS Allow NO Deny Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK1 FAto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option for Class 01 Table 00 Classes Class 00 and 15 cannot be programmed Class 00 has no restrictions Allow Class 15 has restricted outgoing Deny Refer to the table on the next page 4 Press G to write t...

Page 158: ..._______________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ YS Allow NO Deny NON Blank Table 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 Class 01 YS NO NO NO 02 YS NO YS NO NO 03 YS NO NO YS NO NO 04 YS YS NO NO 05 YS 06 YS 07 YS 08 YS 09 YS 10 YS 11 YS 12 YS 13 YS 14 YS ...

Page 159: ...gramming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK1 FBto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option for Class 01 4 Press G to write the data and advance to the next class Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each class 5 After data for the last class is entered the next Memory Block is displayed 6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Relate...

Page 160: ...usted in 1 second intervals R3000 or higher Display Settings Refer to next page for R3000 or higher Programming Procedures LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default Times are in minutes 0 5 1 0 1 5 2 0 3 0 5 0 8 0 No Limit Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK1 FCto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data ...

Page 161: ...imer Class of Service or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 1 03 Hold Recall Time Selection Non Exclusive Hold 1 2 23 System Call Park Recall Time Selection 4 71 Station to Timer Class of Service R3000 or higher 1 When an Exclusive Hold call recalls the held call switches to a Non Exclusive Hold call 2 Telephone ports 1 and 2 are in Station to Timer Class...

Page 162: ... 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default YS Allow NO Deny Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK1 FEto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change data option Default Values Class 01 04 Allow YS Class 05 14 Deny NO 4 Press G to write the data and advance to the next Class Repeat steps 3 and 4 until last Class is assigned 5 The next Memory B...

Page 163: ...ection is the default Table 00 Table 01 Table 02 Table 03 Table 04 Table 05 Table 06 Table 07 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 Table 08 Table 09 Table 10 Table 11 Table 12 Table 13 Table 14 Table 15 Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK1 FFto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change data option for each Table Use the following to enter data C...

Page 164: ...the Memory Block 3 Use the dial pad to enter the data Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data H to clear data The information that can be entered includes OCC Table 01 16 8 digit Setting Data 0 9 NANP X P N Maximum eight digits Operation data includes Default Values OCC Table 01 15 Blank OCC Table 16 1010XXX 4 Press G to write the...

Page 165: ...ble 09 Table 10 Table11 Table 12 Table13 Table14 Table15 Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK1 FHto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change data option Use the following to enter data C to access the next page A to access the previous page Each time a CO PBX line key is pressed the LED toggles between On and Off Default Values OCC Tables 01 15 All...

Page 166: ...es LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default NO YS Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK1 FIto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change data option Default Values Restriction 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line When Tie lines are...

Page 167: ...e 3 1 Notes Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK1 GKto access the Memory Block 3 Used dial pad to enter class restriction Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data Default Values Class 15 4 Press G to write selected data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Wh...

Page 168: ...selection is the default Times are in seconds 00 10 20 30 40 50 60 Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK1 GAto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 1 72 Fir...

Page 169: ...mory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 1 71 First Delay Announcement Start Time Selection 1 8 12 VRS Message Recording Time Selection 1 8 13 VRS Message Function Assignment 3 41 Delay A...

Page 170: ...lt Times are in seconds 00 10 20 30 40 50 60 No Limit Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK1 GCto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 1 74 Second Delay Ann...

Page 171: ... line key to change the data option 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 1 73 First to Second Delay Announcement Interval Time Selection 1 1 75 Second Delay Announcement Repeat Interval Time Selection 1 8 12 VRS Message Recording Time Selection 1 8 13 VRS Messag...

Page 172: ... Times are in seconds 00 10 20 30 40 50 60 No Limit Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK1 GEto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 1 73 First to Second De...

Page 173: ... Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 8 08 Class of Service Station Feature Selection 2 4 17 Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment 4 90 SLT Data Line Security Assignment 1 Monitoring telephone conversations may be illegal under certain circumstances and laws Consult a legal advisor before implementing the mo...

Page 174: ...time for incoming outside line calls Display Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK1 GGto access the Memory Block 3 Use the dial pad to enter data Setting data KK II Default Values 15 Seconds 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 2 26 Delayed Ringing...

Page 175: ...o enter Entry No 01 and Tel Port No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data Default Values Not specified 4 Press G to write the data and advance to the next Entry No After each tel port No is selected press G again A total of 15 entries can be made After the last data is entered the next Memory Block is displayed 5 Program the nex...

Page 176: ...e the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data Default Values Not specified 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 8 08 Class of Service Station Feature Selection 2 2 06 Line Key Selection For Tenant Mode ...

Page 177: ...ttings LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default Times are in milliseconds 70 60 100 70 400 100 600 100 900 200 Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK1 HKto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E...

Page 178: ...his Memory Block can be adjusted in 1 second intervals R3000 or higher Display 2500 or lower Settings Refer to the next page for R3000 or higher Programming Procedures LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default 2s 4s 8s 16s 32s Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK1 HAto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the d...

Page 179: ... 04 Seconds 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 15 07 K CCIS Message Response Timeout Assignment 3 91 Trunk Type Selection 3 92 Trunk Installed DP DTMF Selection 1 When Maximum Digits are assigned and a user dials a phone number equal to the limit set the diale...

Page 180: ... the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data Default Values Not specified 4 Press G to write the data 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for all code Tables The next Memory Block is displayed 6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Example Set Code Table 01 to 67 When Tel 100 user dials Access Code 9 Feature Code 67 Telephone Nu...

Page 181: ...K 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default YS NO Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK1 HFto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 8 08 Clas...

Page 182: ...3000 or higher Display R2500 or lower Settings Refer to next page for R3000 or higher Programming Procedures LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default 90s 120s No Limit Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK2 to access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option 4 Press G to write the data and display the next ...

Page 183: ... back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 7 06 External Paging Timeout Selection 4 93 Internal Zone Paging Selection 4 71 Station to Timer Class of Service R3000 or higher 1 Types of paging include H All Internal Zone 51 H Internal Zone Paging 52 54 H External Zone Paging all speakers 55 H External Zone Paging individual speakers 56 58 H Internal External Zone Paging 59 2 Te...

Page 184: ...ress the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 6 03 DSS Call Voice Tone Signal Selection 1 To switch from voice to tone signaling or from tone to voice dial a station number then dial 1 2 When tone signaling...

Page 185: ...adjusted in 1 minute intervals R3000 or higher Display R2500 or lower Settings Refer to next page for R3000 or higher Programming Procedures LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default 30s 1m 2m 3m 5m 10m 20m 30m Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK2 KBto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change data option 4 Press G...

Page 186: ...imit 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Timer Class of Service 5 Program the next Timer Class of Service or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 4 71 Station to Timer Class of Service R3000 or higher 1 Telephone Ports 1 and 2 are in Station to Timer Class of Service Class 1 by default All other ports are in Station to Timer Class of Service Clas...

Page 187: ...tings LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default 2DGT 3DGT 4DGT 5DGT 6DGT 7DGT Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK2 KCto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Progra...

Page 188: ...1 47 Access Code 2 Digit Assignment AC20 301 Digit Table 01 MB 1 1 48 Access Code 3 Digit Assignment Table 01 Dial 0 001 Station Number Station Numbers are 2000 2009 200X 5 Digit Station Numbers MB 1 2 03 2 7 Digit Station Number Selection 5DGT MB 1 2 34 Expanded Station Number Assignment 2 MB 1 1 47 Access Code 2 Digit Assignment AC20 301 Digit Table 01 MB 1 1 48 Access Code 3 Digit Assignment Ta...

Page 189: ...6 LK 7 LK 8 Port 33 36 Port 37 40 Port 41 44 Port 45 48 Port 49 52 Port 53 56 Port 57 60 Port 61 64 Page 3 Ports 65 96 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 Port 65 68 Port 69 72 Port 73 76 Port 77 80 Port 81 84 Port 85 88 Port 89 92 Port 93 96 Page 4 Ports 97 CO LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 Port 97 A0 Port A1 A4 Port A5 A8 Port A9 B2 Port B3 B6 Port B7 C0 Programming Procedures 1 Go ...

Page 190: ...imum of 120 ports to be shared by station ports ESI SLI FMS VMS and OPX and Call Arrival Keys When 32 station ports are being used 88 remain for use as Call Arrival CAR Keys 2 The total number of shared and CAR ports are shared with PS ports 3 The Electra Elite IPK basic system allows a maximum of 32 ports to be shared by Legacy stations ESI SLI FMS VMS and OPX and Call Arrival Keys In addition to...

Page 191: ...o move the cursor right H to clear data Setting Data Tel Port No 01 120 Specified Station Access Code is 00 23 4 Press G to write data and display the next Specified Station Access Code 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each Specified Station Access Code 6 The next Memory Block is displayed 7 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 1 ...

Page 192: ...___________________________________________________________________________________ Notes 1 Specified stations can be accessed from intercom ICM dial tone or as an outside caller calling into the Electra Elite IPK system Auto Attendant 2 The Specified Access Code is assigned in Memory Blocks 1 1 46 or 1 1 47 Access Code 1 Digit 2 Digit Assignment ...

Page 193: ...ursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data H to clear data 4 Enter the characters to be displayed Refer to Appendix B Character Codes Section 1 Character Assignment on page B 1 5 After entering each message for Memory Block 1 2 9 18 Custom Message 1 10 Assignment press G to write the data The next Memory Block is displayed 6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on...

Page 194: ...2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default OFF ON A B C D E F Page 2 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 G H Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 L2 AIto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option Use the following to enter data C to go to the next page A to go to the previous page 4 Press G to write the data...

Page 195: ...__ ___________________________________________________________________________________ Document Revision 4 Electra Elite IPK The Ring Patterns are listed in the table below s seconds Pattern Line Key OFF LK 1 ON LK 2 A LK 3 B LK 4 C LK 5 D LK 6 E LK 7 F LK 8 G LK 1 Pg 2 H LK 2 Pg 2 0s 1s 2s 3s 4s 5s 6s ...

Page 196: ...e default A B C D E F G H Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK2 BKto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line The available tones are Tone A 480 600 Tone B 480 606 Tone C 1024 1285 Tone D 1024 Tone E 500 Tone F...

Page 197: ... 64 Page 3 Ports 65 96 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 Port 65 68 Port 69 72 Port 73 76 Port 77 80 Port 81 84 Port 85 88 Port 89 92 Port 93 96 Page 4 Ports 97 C0 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 Port 97 A0 Port A1 A4 Port A5 A8 Port A9 B2 Port B3 B6 Port B7 C0 Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK2 BAto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key ...

Page 198: ...n support a maximum of 40 PS II stations 3 The Electra Elite IPK basic system can have 32 ports to be shared by station ports ESI SLI FMS VMS CNF and OPX Call Arrival Keys and PS stations If 24 station ports are being used eight remain for use as PS stations 4 The Electra Elite IPK expanded system allows a maximum of 120 ports to be shared by station ports ESI SLI FMS VMS CNF and OPX Call Arrival ...

Page 199: ... This Memory Block can be adjusted in 1 second intervals R3000 or higher Display R2500 or lower Settings Refer to next page for R3000 or higher Programming Procedures LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default 4s 8s 12s 18s 24s 30s 60s Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK2 BBto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to chan...

Page 200: ...ramming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 1 46 Access Code 1 Digit Assignment 1 1 47 Access Code 2 Digit Assignment 1 1 48 Access Code 3 Digit Assignment 1 2 01 Intercom Call Voice Tone Signal Selection 1 8 08 Class of Service Station Feature Selection 2 4 17 Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment 4 42 Call Forward Busy Immediately Delay Selection 4 71 Station to Timer Class of Service R3000 ...

Page 201: ...cond intervals R3000 or higher Display Settings Refer to next page for R3000 or higher Programming Procedures LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default Times are in minutes 0 5 1 0 1 5 2 0 3 0 5 0 8 0 10 0 Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK2 BCto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option 4 Press G ...

Page 202: ...lass 1 4 060s 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Timer Class of Service 5 Program the next Timer Class of Service or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 4 71 Station to Timer Class of Service 1 Telephone Ports 1 and 2 are in Station to Timer Class of Service Class 1 by default All other ports are in Station to Timer Class of Service Class 2 by ...

Page 203: ...ing to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data B or to enter or 4 Press G to write the data and advance to the next Dial No 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each Dial No The next Memory Block is displayed 6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line System Mode 1 Submode 2 Data No 24 PC Programming BA 2 4 F E A A C 0 0 0 4 T I M E D I S P L...

Page 204: ..._______________________________ Notes Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 2 01 Intercom Call Voice Tone Signal Selection 1 8 08 Class of Service Station Feature Selection 2 1 8 26 Voice Mail Quick Transfer Master Hunt Number 4 17 Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment 1 Features can be assigned to more than one dial number 2 To enter or under Dial Numbers Selection press B o...

Page 205: ...lert tone is provided when Internal Paging is used Display Settings LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default YS NO Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK2 BEto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or pre...

Page 206: ...rnal calls Display Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK2 BFto access the Memory Block 3 Enter data using the dial pad Setting Data KK II Default Values 10 seconds 4 Press G to write data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 4 37 Extension Line Key Ring Assignment Day Mode 4 38...

Page 207: ... the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data Default Values 08 seconds 4 Press G to write data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line 1 When the PS Out of Area time is shorter than the Call Forward No Answer time the caller receives an Out of Area indication 2 This Memory Block is used to define the Time a system searc...

Page 208: ...ng SMDR System Software R2500 is required Display Settings Page 1 Ports 01 32 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 Default No PS Telephone Blocks are assigned Port 01 04 Port 05 08 Port 09 12 Port 13 16 Port 17 20 Port 21 24 Port 25 28 Port 29 32 Page 2 Ports 33 64 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 Port 33 36 Port 37 40 Port 41 44 Port 45 48 Port 49 52 Port 53 56 Port 57 60 Port 61 64 Pag...

Page 209: ...ment 1 2 04 Call Arrival Key Block Assignment 1 2 21 PS Telephone Block Assignment 1 2 33 IP Telephone Block Assignment Allow Deny Selection 4 07 Code Restriction Class Assignment Day Mode 4 08 Code Restriction Class Assignment Night Mode 4 40 LCR Class Selection 4 54 Enhanced 911 CESID to Station Table Assignment 4 56 SMDR Telephone Print Selection 4 67 IP Station Number Assignment 1 The Electra ...

Page 210: ...lephones to connect to the IPCA U ETU to use resources from the CPUI U Legacy system When this Memory Block is set to NO Deny Memory Block 1 2 32 cannot be assigned System Software R2500 is required Display Settings LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default YS Allow NO Deny Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK2 CCto access the Memory Block 3 Press t...

Page 211: ...1 2 21 PS Telephone Block Assignment 1 2 32 IP Telephone Block Assignment 1 5 13 Printer Connected Selection 4 07 Code Restriction Class Assignment Day Mode 4 08 Code Restriction Class Assignment Night Mode 4 40 LCR Class Selection 4 47 ISDN Directory Number Selection 4 54 Enhanced 911 CESID to Station Table Assignment 4 56 SMDR Telephone Print Selection 4 62 ISDN PRI Directory Number Selection 4 ...

Page 212: ...R2500 is required Display Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK2 CDto access the Memory Block 3 Enter data using the dial pad Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data 2 3 or 4 digit Blank Not Specified 5 digit 1 8 6 digit 10 89 7 digit 100 899 Default Values Not Specified 4 Press G to write data and display the next M...

Page 213: ...y Block Name 1 1 46 Access Code 1 Digit Assignment 1 1 47 Access Code 2 Digit Assignment 1 1 48 Access Code 3 Digit Assignment 1 2 03 2 7 Digit Station Number Assignment 1 8 26 Voice Mail Quick Transfer Master Hunt Number 4 10 Station Number Assignment The setting data depends on the assignment in Memory Block 1 2 03 For 2 3 or 4 digits Blank Not Assigned For 5 digits 1 8 Assign one digit For 6 di...

Page 214: ...lay Settings Page 1 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default 0ms 100ms 200ms 300ms 400ms 500ms 600ms 700ms Page 2 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 800ms 900ms 1000ms 1100ms 1200ms 1300ms 1400ms 1500ms Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK3 to access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option 4 Press G...

Page 215: ...SH Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK3 KBto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 1 02 Hookflash Time Selection 4 24 SLT Hookflash Assignment 1 When Hold ...

Page 216: ...phone user dials a digit before the time expires a PBR interdigit time starts This Memory Block can be adjusted in 1 second intervals R3000 or higher Display R2500 or lower Settings Refer to next page for R3000 or higher Programming Procedures LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default 10s 20s 30s 40s 50s 60s Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK3 KCt...

Page 217: ...the Memory Block 3 Use the dial pad to enter the Data Setting for Class 1 Setting Data 01s 99s e g 05s 5s Default Values 10s 4 Press G to write the data and display the next memory block 5 Program the next memory block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 8 10 PBR Interdigit Release Time Selection 4 95 DTMF DP SLT Type Selection R3000 or higher is requir...

Page 218: ...rcom or CO PBX call Display Settings LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default YS NO Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK3 KDto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related...

Page 219: ...re in milliseconds 40 90 140 190 240 290 340 390 Page 2 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 440 490 540 590 640 690 740 790 Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK3 KEto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option Press C to cycle between pages 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Blo...

Page 220: ... 200 ms 03 HST 300 ms 04 HST 400 ms 05 HST 500 ms 06 HST 600 ms 07 HST 700 ms Page 2 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 08 HST 800 ms 09 HST 900 ms 10 HST 1000 ms 11 HST 1100 ms 12 HST 1200 ms 13 HST 1300 ms 14 HST 1400 ms 15 HST 1500 ms Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK3 KFto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option Press C...

Page 221: ...hen a call is forwarded Display Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK3 KGto access the Memory Block 3 Use the dial pad to enter data Use the following to enter data K Ito enter numeric data B Jto enter B Lto enter Setting Data 0 9 Default Values All Blank 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Relate...

Page 222: ...K 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default 0s 1s 2s 3s 4s 5s 6s 8s Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK3 KHto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Num...

Page 223: ... Settings LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default 0 5s 1 0s 1 5s 2 0s 3 0s 3 5s Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK3 KIto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Pr...

Page 224: ...K 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default for Duration and Interdigit Time Times are in milliseconds 60 70 110 80 410 100 610 100 810 190 Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK3 AKto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX key to change data option Default Values Duration time 110 ms Interdigit Time 80 ms 4 Press G to write the data and advance to th...

Page 225: ...mming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK3 AAto access the Memory Block 3 Use the dial pad to enter data Use the following to enter data K Ito enter numeric data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right Setting Data 01 99 sec Default Values 10 sec 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Progra...

Page 226: ...tes 1 This Memory Block applies only to trunks without answer supervision i e loop or ground start 2 A hookflash before this timer or far end answer detection drops the new call and returns to the original call 3 A hookflash after this timer or far end answer detection results in a three party Conference call two COs and one Single Line Telephone 4 A blind transfer can be performed anytime by hang...

Page 227: ... account codes set up by TELCO that must be entered by Single Line Telephone users R3000 or higher is required Display Settings LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default NO YES Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK3 ABto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX key to change data option 4 Press G to write the data and advance to the n...

Page 228: ...a Elite IPK Features and Specifications Manual Notes Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK4 to access the Memory Block 3 Use the dial pad to enter data Use the following to enter data K Ito enter numeric data Jto move cursor left Lto move the cursor right Setting Data 001 999 Minutes 000 No Limit H to clear Data 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program ...

Page 229: ...mated Attendant trunk This Memory Block can be adjusted in 1 second intervals R3000 or higher Display R2500 or lower Settings Refer to next page for R3000 or higher Programming Procedures LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default 5s 10s 20s 30s 40s 50s 60s Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK4 JAto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding C...

Page 230: ...efault Values 20s 4 Press G to write the data and display the next memory block 5 Program the next memory block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 4 71 Station to Timer Class of Service R3000 or higher 1 After PBR is connected dialing must be completed in the specified time After the first digit is dialed interdigit time default 7 sec controls the PBR ti...

Page 231: ...ed station This Memory Block can be adjusted in 1 second intervals R3000 or higher Display Settings Refer to next page for R3000 or higher Programming Procedures LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default 10s 20s 30s No Limit Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK4 JBto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change data op...

Page 232: ...e the dial pad to enter the Data Setting for Class 1 Setting Data 00s 99s e g 02s 2s Default Values Class 1 4 00s 00s No Limit 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Timer Class of Service 5 Program the next Timer Class of Service or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 4 01 CO PBX Ring Assignment Day Mode 4 02 CO PBX Ring Assignment Night Mode 4 71...

Page 233: ...ot answer in the specified time The ringing tone changes to the normal tone and station C starts ringing Any station A B or C user can press the flashing line key to answer the call 4 Select No Limit to disable this feature 1 Telephone ports 1 and 2 are in Station to Timer Class of Service Class 1 by default All other ports are in Station to Timer Class of Service Class 2 by default R3000 or highe...

Page 234: ...his Memory Block can be adjusted in 1 second intervals R3000 or higher Display R2500 or lower Settings Refer to next page for R3000 or higher Programming Procedures LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default 1m 2m 3m 4m Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK4 JCto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data opti...

Page 235: ...otes Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK4 J Cto access the Memory Block 3 Use the dial pad to enter the Data Setting for Class 1 Setting Data 001s 255s e g 180s 3min Default Values 120s 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line 1 When the called party does not answer in the programmed time the call is...

Page 236: ...tting Data Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right Setting Data Allowed 2 Digit Number 10 89 3 Digit Number 100 899 4 Digit Number 1000 8999 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 2 03 2 3 or 4 Digit Station Number Select...

Page 237: ...LK 8 The shaded selection is the default NO YS Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK4 JEto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 1 27 Automatic Day Night Mod...

Page 238: ...Press LK1 LK4 JHto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line 1 When NORMAL is selected and a DTMF tone is not received during the Automated Attendant message or during the Automated Attendant Push Button Receiver PBR Release T...

Page 239: ...Elite IPK Features and Specifications Manual Notes LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default FR AF Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK4 JIto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option Setting Data FR While the Automated Attendant sends the message AF After the Automated Attendant sends the message 4 ...

Page 240: ...tion is the default YS NO Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK4 JJAAto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change data option for AA MSG1 in DY Day Mode Use the following to enter data A Hto enter numerical data B to toggle between Day Mode and Night Mode 4 Press G to write the data and display the next message 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for all eight me...

Page 241: ...1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK4 JJABto access the Memory Block 3 Use the dial pad to change the Tenant for AA MSG1 K Ito enter Tenant Number Default Values All Automated Attendant Messages Tenant No 00 4 Press G to write the data and advance to the next message 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for all AA messages The next Memory Block is displayed 6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line ...

Page 242: ...ing Refer to individual features in the Electra Elite IPK Features and Specifications Manual Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK4 JJACto access the Memory Block 3 Use the dial pad to enter the delay time for AA MSG 1 KK IIto enter number of seconds Default Values All Automated Attendant Messages 4 sec 4 Press G to write the data and advance to the next AA MSG 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4...

Page 243: ... the dial pad to enter function code for AA MSG 1 Dial No 0 UseK Ito enter the function code Setting Data Allowed Function Code 001 053 000 is unused 4 Press G to write the data and advance to the next dial number 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each Dial No AA MSG 2 Dial No 0 is displayed 6 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each Dial No AA MSG 3 Dial No 0 is displayed 7 Continue this cycle for all Dial NOs for...

Page 244: ...PBX Ring Assignment Night Mode to ring according to those assignments 2 Functions 015 016 Ring Internal Paging Zone A B C require assigning the following to ring the desired station Memory Block 4 01 CO PBX Ring Assignment Day Mode Memory Block 4 02 CO PBX Ring Assignment Night Mode Memory Block 4 93 Internal Zone Paging Selection 3 When a caller receives a busy signal after being transferred by t...

Page 245: ...fied Station Call 04 008 Automated Attendant Message 8 035 Specified Station Call 05 009 Not Used 036 Specified Station Call 06 010 Internal Number Station Number 037 Specified Station Call 07 011 Bypass Automated Attendant 038 Specified Station Call 08 012 Not Used 039 Specified Station Call 09 013 Not Used 040 Specified Station Call 10 014 Not Used 041 Specified Station Call 11 015 Ring Internal...

Page 246: ...owing to enter data K Hto enter Automated Attendant message number KK IIto enter Dial No 4 Press G to write the data and to advance the Dial No 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each Dial No Message 2 Dial No 00 is displayed 6 Continue this cycle until the Dial number function codes are assigned to all AA MSGs The next Memory Block is displayed 7 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on lin...

Page 247: ... in the Electra Elite IPK Features and Specifications Manual LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK4 JJAFto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the number of times a message is repeated Default Values All Messages One Time 4 Press G to write the data and ...

Page 248: ...fault RBT MOH Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK4 JJAGto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option Example To change Ringback tone to Music On Hold press CO PBX LK2 4 Press G to write the data and advance to the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Blo...

Page 249: ... 2 Press LK1 LK4 JJAHto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the 2nd MSG for 1st MSG 1 Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data C to toggle between pages Default Values 1st MSG No 1 8 Not Specified 4 Press G to write the data and advance to the next 1st MSG 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each 1st ...

Page 250: ...m 2m 3m 4m Page 2 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 5m 10m 20m Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK4 JJAIto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the interval time Example To change 4 minutes to 10 seconds press CO PBX LK2 Press C to toggle between pages Default Values 4 minutes 4 Press G to write the data and advance to the next Memory Bl...

Page 251: ...tion is the default 0s 10s 20s 30s 1m 2m 3m 4m Page 2 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 5m 10m 20m Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK4 JJBKto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the disconnect time Example To change 30 seconds to 10 seconds press CO PBX LK2 Press C to toggle between pages Default Values 30 seconds 4 Press G to write th...

Page 252: ...to move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data 2 Digit Station Number 10 89 3 Digit Station Number 100 899 4 Digit Station Number 1000 8999 H to clear all data when cursor is at setting position Default Values No Message Specified 4 Press G to write the data and advance to the next AA MSG 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each AA MSG The next Memory Block is displayed 6 Program the next Memory Block o...

Page 253: ...rsor right K Ito enter numeric data 2 Digit Station Number 10 89 3 Digit Station Number 100 899 4 Digit Station Number 1000 8999 H to clear all data when cursor is at setting position Default Values No Message Specified 4 Press G to write the data and display the next AA MSG 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each AA MSG The next Memory Block is displayed 6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go b...

Page 254: ...st four digits are masked and printed as XXXX Display Settings LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default ALL MSK Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK5 to access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option 4 Press G to write the data The next Memory Block is displayed 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E...

Page 255: ...Press LK1 LK5 ACto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option 4 Press G to write the data The next Memory Block is displayed 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 5 02 SMDR Print Format 1 5 14 Printer Line Feed Control Selection 1 5 25 SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment 1 8 35 C...

Page 256: ...l record Display Settings LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default YS NO Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK5 ADto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option 4 Press G to write the data The next Memory Block is displayed 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programmi...

Page 257: ...________________________ Document Revision 4 Electra Elite IPK Notes Example Settings to specify the format of communication data output to the printer H Line Feed control in effect 07 03 92 09 00 08 05 12 OG 123 00 15 32 102885167537000 LCR FWD234 12345678 H No Line Feed control 07 03 92 09 00 08 05 12 OG 123 00 15 32 10288516753700 LCR IWD234 12345678 No Limit ...

Page 258: ... CO PBX call Display Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK5 BEto access the Memory Block 3 Use the dial pad to enter data Minimum time assignment is 000 sec Time assignment can be set from 000 099 sec in increments of 10 Default Values 040 seconds 4 Press G to write the data The next Memory Block is displayed 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Progr...

Page 259: ...ng call records only ALL print incoming and outgoing call records Display Settings LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default ALL OUT INC Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK5 BFto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option 4 Press G to write the data The next Memory Block is displayed 5 Program the ne...

Page 260: ...ve the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data 4 Press G to write the data and advance to the next DSS No 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each DSS The next Memory Block is displayed 6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 7 2 Telephone Type Assignment 1 The telephone with an Attendant Add On Console connected ...

Page 261: ...ault TONE VOICE Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK6 J J C 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option 4 Press G to write the data The next Memory Block is displayed 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 6 01 Attendant Add On Console to Telephone Port Assignment 1 To switch Voice Tone...

Page 262: ...one INT B Paging Zone INT C Paging Zone INT ALL Paging Zones EXT A Paging Zone EXT B Paging Zone Page 2 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 EXT C Paging Zone EXT ALL Paging Zones MSG Waiting NT MOD Night Mode TRF Transfer IN OUT Attendant Station Outgoing Lockout CO Trunk 01 64 Page 3 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 VM Live Record VB Mail Box DPH 1 Doorphone DPH 2 Doorphone RELAY 0 Gen...

Page 263: ...neral Purpose Relay 0 and 1 DSS Key Number 4 Press G to write the data 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for all buttons for each DSS The next Memory Block is displayed 6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Programming Procedures Continued 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 ...

Page 264: ...line keys 1 48 only 6 The VM Live Record key with Live Record has seven features Each function can be assigned by dialing the Feature No using the dial pad after pressing LK1 on page 3 7 Digital Voice Mail Mailbox Number can be entered using two three or four digits of the Mailbox number on the dial pad This feature is used for Live Record addressing The Live Record feature must be assigned also t...

Page 265: ...ting Data 1 Use the dial pad to select Setting Data 2 Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor to the left Lto move the cursor to the right K Ito enter numeric data H to clear all data Setting Data 2 Mailbox No 2 digits 10 89 3 digits 100 899 4 digits 1000 8999 4 Press G to write the selected data The next Lamp No is displayed After all 48 lamps are assigned the next Board No is display...

Page 266: ...ox of the DSS BLF extension When YS is selected the call is transferred to the DSS BLF extension When NO is selected the Live Record session is addressed to that DSS BLF extension no transfer Display Settings LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default NO YS Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK6 J J Hto access the Memory Block 3 Press the correspondin...

Page 267: ...__________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ Document Revision 4 Electra Elite IPK THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 268: ...DPH2 DPH3 DPH4 Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK7 to access the Memory Block 3 Press the CO PBX line key corresponding to each doorphone The LED changes to indicate the data each time the CO PBX line key is pressed 4 Press G to write the data The next Memory Block is displayed 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Bloc...

Page 269: ...ed in 1 second intervals R3000 or higher Display R2500 or lower Settings Refer to next page for R3000 or higher Programming Procedures LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default 10s 30s 60s 90s Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK7 KAto access the Memory Block 3 Press the CO PBX line key corresponding to the time assignment 4 Press G to write the dat...

Page 270: ... Press LK1 LK7 KAto access the Memory Block 3 Use the dial pad to enter the Data Setting for Class 1 Setting Data 01s 99s e g 02s 2s Default Values 10s 4 Press G to write the data and display the next memory block 5 Program the next memory block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 7 00 Doorphone Assignment R3000 or higher is required to adjust this memo...

Page 271: ... ESP C Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK7 KBto access the Memory Block 3 Press the CO PBX line key corresponding to each ESP Zone The LED changes to indicate the data each time the CO PBX line key is pressed 4 Press G to write the data The next Memory Block is displayed 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name ...

Page 272: ...isplay Settings LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default YS NO Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK7 KCto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option 4 Press G to write the data The next Memory Block is displayed 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Num...

Page 273: ...ault OFF ON A B C D E F Page 2 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 G H Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK7 KDto access the Memory Block 3 Press the CO PBX line key corresponding to the time assignment Press C to alternate pages 4 Press G to write the data The next Memory Block is displayed 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Nu...

Page 274: ..._________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ The Doorphone Ring Patterns are shown in the table below s seconds Pattern Line Key Tone Off LK 1 Tone On LK 2 A LK 3 B LK 4 C LK 5 D LK 6 E LK 7 F LK 8 G LK 1 Pg 2 H LK 2 Pg 2 6s 0s 1s 2s 3s 4s 5s ...

Page 275: ... E F G H Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK7 KEto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option The available tones are 4 Press G to write the data 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each of the four doorphones The next Memory Block is displayed 6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line System Mode 1 Submode 7 Data No 05 PC...

Page 276: ..._______________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 7 00 Doorphone Assignment 1 7 04 Doorphone Ring Pattern Selection 4 03 Doorphone Chime Assignment Day Mode 4 04 Doorphone Chime Assignment Night Mode ...

Page 277: ...k can be adjusted in 1 second intervals R3000 or higher Display Settings Refer to next page for R3000 or higher Programming Procedures LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default Times are in minutes 0 5 1 0 1 5 2 0 3 0 5 0 8 0 No Limit Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK7 KFto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to chan...

Page 278: ...e Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 2 00 Internal Paging Timeout Selection 1 7 02 External Speaker Connection Selection 4 71 Station to Timer Class of Service R3000 or higher 1 Types of paging include H All Internal Zone 51 H Internal Zone Paging 52 54 H External Zone Paging all speakers 55 H External Zone Paging individual speakers 56 58 H Internal External Zone Paging 59 2 Telep...

Page 279: ...ess the Memory Block 3 Press corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option Use dial pad keys 1 4 to specify external ring relay 4 Press G to write the data 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each of the four Ring Relays The next Memory Block is displayed 6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 2 00 Internal Paging Timeout S...

Page 280: ...ing Manual 2 203 ___________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ s seconds Pattern 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Continuous 0s 1s 2s 3s 4s 5s 6s ...

Page 281: ...ime C B Chime Both Start and End 4 Tone Chime Notes LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default PRT C S C B Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK7 KHto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option 4 Press G to write the data The next Memory Block is displayed 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to g...

Page 282: ...K 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection in ms is the default 000 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 Page 2 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK7 KIto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option Use the following when entering data A or C to cycle betw...

Page 283: ...__________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ Document Revision 4 Electra Elite IPK THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 284: ...LK 8 Default not assigned PBR 1 and 2 PBR 3 and 4 Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK8 to access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option The LED indication changes to indicate the data each time the CO PBX line key is pressed 4 Press G to write the data The next Memory Block is displayed 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go b...

Page 285: ...mory Block 3 Use the dial pad to change the data option The information that can be entered includes Setting Data Receiving Level 00 33 0 dBm 01 34 0 dBm 02 35 0 dBm 03 36 0 dBm 04 37 0 dBm 05 38 0 dBm 06 39 0 dBm 07 40 0 dBm 08 41 0 dBm 09 42 0 dBm 10 43 0 dBm 11 44 0 dBm 12 45 0 dBm 13 46 0 dBm 14 47 0 dBm 15 48 0 dBm 4 Press G to write the data and advance to the next PBR 5 Enter next PBR and p...

Page 286: ...____________________________________________ Notes 1 When the Automated Attendant answers the DTMF signal level from the calling party is reduced from the Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN This Memory Block specifies the minimum detectable receiving level Setting Data 15 is the most sensitive 2 PBR 1 data is for Channels 1 and 2 and PBR 2 is for Channels 3 and 4 in the CPUI U ETU ...

Page 287: ...oon to 11 59 p m or 24 hour 00 00 to 23 59 time display Display Settings LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default 12 24 Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK8 KDto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option 4 Press G to write the data The next Memory Block is displayed 5 Program the next Memory Block ...

Page 288: ...hing Per Tenant System Speed Dial Programming Not Used Not Used Not Used Automatic Trunk to Trunk Transfer Set Reset Automated Attendant DISA Set Reset Mode Page 2 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 Timed Alarm for Single Line Telephone Set Reset Call Forward Set Reset from Destination Station System Wide Reset Refer to Note 1 Password Outgoing Restriction Refer to Note 2 DISA Password Cancel...

Page 289: ... is displayed 6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 8 08 Class of Service Station Feature Selection 2 4 17 Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment 1 System Wide Reset selection resets the following Call Forward All Call Do Not Disturb Customized Message and Callback Request 2 Password Outgoing Restriction selection c...

Page 290: ...k Transfer Set Reset and programming of Outgoing Numbers Allow Deny LK8 Automated Attendant DISA Mode Set Reset Allow Deny Page 2 LK1 Timed Alarm Set Reset for Single Line Telephones From Attendant Allow Deny LK2 Call Forward All Call Set Reset from Destination Station Call Forward CAR Keys Call Forward All Call Set and Call Forward Busy No Answer set Allow Deny LK3 System Wide Reset of Timed Alar...

Page 291: ...ed Party Timed Alarm Set Cancel From SLT General Purpose Relay Voice Tone Override Originate Page 2 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 Absence Message Callback Request Set Station Outgoing Lockout Set Not Used Call Forward Busy No Answer Set VRS Voice Message Not Used DISA Password Set Page 3 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 Not Used User Ringing Line Preference Set Reset Voice Tone Ov...

Page 292: ... 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 Send Caller ID to SLT Not Used Station Name Assignment Hot Key Pad Interactive Soft Keys DNIS Display Not Used Not Used Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK8 KHto access the Memory Block 3 Use the dial pad to enter Class No Use the following to enter Class No K Ito enter numeric data Jto move cursor left Lto move the cursor right 4 Press the cor...

Page 293: ...ice in Memory Block 4 17 Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment 4 LCR ARS Bypass Page 3 LK 4 applies only when the station is assigned to an LCR ARS Class 1 4 in Memory Block 4 40 LCR Class Selection LCR ARS Bypass does not apply when using access codes to directly access an ARS Table functions 601 604 ARS Tables 1 4 in Memory Blocks 1 1 46 48 Access Code 1 2 3 Digit Assignment 5 ARS Overf...

Page 294: ...ncel From SLT Allow Deny LK7 General Purpose Relay Allow Deny LK8 Voice Override Tone Override Originate Allow Deny Page 2 LK1 Absence Message Allow Deny LK2 Callback Request Originate Allow Deny LK3 Station Outgoing Lockout Set Cancel Allow Deny LK4 Not Used N A N A LK5 Call Forward Busy No Answer Set Allow Deny LK6 VRS Voice Message Record Verify Erase Allow Deny LK7 Not Used N A N A LK8 DISA Pa...

Page 295: ...Deny LK8 Unsupervised Conference Deny Deny Page 5 LK1 Forced Account Code Authorization Code Deny Deny LK2 Group Listening Selection Deny Deny LK3 Station Relocation Allow Deny LK4 Set Call Forward Off Premise Related to Page 1 LK1 and Page 2 LK5 Deny Deny LK5 Pre Set Dialing Allow Deny Deny Deny LK6 Live Monitoring Deny Deny LK7 Caller ID Display Selection If allow is set Caller ID Name and Numbe...

Page 296: ...3000 or higher Version 6 00 MIFM or higher Deny Deny Page 7 LK1 Send Caller ID Information to SLT R3000 or higher Deny Deny LK2 Not Used N A N A LK3 Station Name Assignment Own Station R4000 or higher Allow Deny LK4 Hot Key Pad R4000 or higher Deny Deny LK5 Interactive Soft Keys R4000 or higher Deny Deny LK6 DNIS Display for Transferred Calls R4000 or higher Deny Deny LK7 Not Used LK8 Not Used Cor...

Page 297: ... to change the data option 4 Press G to write the data The next Memory Block is displayed 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 8 31 Hold Tone Source Assignment 1 8 32 Hold Interval Tone Volume Selection 1 Music on Hold can be provided to CO PBX and intercom calls that are placed on hold 2 One of two melodies can be selecte...

Page 298: ... 6s 7s 8s 9s 10s Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK8 AKto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option 4 Press G to write the data The next Memory Block is displayed 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 3 03 First Digit PBR Release Time Selection 1 8 01 SLT or...

Page 299: ...___________ Document Revision 4 Electra Elite IPK Memory Block 1 8 10 Memory Block 1 8 10 Specified Time 7 sec Default Specified Time 7 sec Default Memory Block 1 3 03 Specified Time 10 sec Default 7 Off hook Dial Tone is sent PBR connected Dial the first digit 5 9 3 Dial the second digit Dial the third digit When the PBR is not detected in the specified time PBR is released ...

Page 300: ... 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default NON 4H 8H 12H 24H Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK8 AAto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option 4 Press G to write the data The next Memory Block is displayed 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line The system automatically refreshes its...

Page 301: ...K1 LK8 ABto access the Memory Block 3 Press corresponding CO PBX line key to change data option Use the following to enter VRS Channel K Hto enter numeric data Default Values All VRS Channels Recording Time 15 seconds 16 messages 4 Press G to write the data and advance to the next VRS Channel 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each of the seven remaining VRS channels The next Memory Block is displayed 6 P...

Page 302: ... LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default NON V1 Voice Prompt V2 Voice Prompt M1 Delay message M2 Delay message Not Used Not Used Not Used Page 2 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 D1 Day A A D2 Day A A D3 Day A A D4 Day A A D5 Day A A D6 Day A A D7 Day A A D8 Day A A Page 3 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 N1 Night A A N2 Night A A N3 Night A A N4 Night A A N5 Night A A N6 Night ...

Page 303: ... LK1 LK8 ACto access the Memory Block 3 Press corresponding CO PBX line key to change data option Use to the following to enter data K Ito enter VRS Channel and message number Jto move cursor left Lto move cursor right C to go to the next page A to go back to the previous page Default Values All Channels of Block No Message 4 Press G to write the data and advance to the next message After Message ...

Page 304: ...C D E F G H Page 2 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 I J K L M Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK8 AEto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the Setting Data option Use the following to enter data K Ito enter Table No C to alternate between pages 4 Press G to write the data and advance to the next table 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each r...

Page 305: ...ocument Revision 4 Electra Elite IPK Table Number Tone LCD Default 00 ICM Dial Tone DT A 01 Second Dial Tone 2DT B 02 Special Dial Tone SPDT C 03 Busy Tone BT D 04 Reorder Error Tone ROT E 05 Howler Tone HWT F 06 Service Set Tone SST G 07 ICM Ringback Tone RBT1 I 08 Tie DID Ringback Tone RBT2 H 09 Call Waiting Tone CWT J 10 LCR Dial Tone SDTT K 11 Tone Burst 1 TB1 G 12 Tone Burst 2 TB2 K ...

Page 306: ...______________________________________________ Tone Frequency Intermit Cycle A 350 440 Continuous B 350 440 120 IPM 0 25 On 0 25 Off C 440 240 IPM 0 125 On 0 125 Off D 480 620 60 IPM 0 5 On 0 5 Off E 480 620 120 IPM F 2400 16 Modulation Continuous G 440 Continuous H 440 480 2 sec On 4 sec Off I 440 480 1 sec On 2 sec Off J 440 60 IPM K 400 Continuous L 800 60 IPM M No Tone Continuous ...

Page 307: ...d Specifications Manual LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default PR1 PR2 Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK8 AFto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change data option Table No 1 Dial tone Table No 2 Call Waiting tone Default Values Dial Tone PR1 Call Waiting Tone PR2 4 Press G to write the data and advance to Ta...

Page 308: ... G to write the data and advance to Class 2 End User Mode 5 After entering Class 2 password press G to write the data The next Memory Block is displayed 6 Program next Memory Block or press E to go back on line 1 Password 1 Class 1 is used for Technician SAT PC Programming 2 Password 2 Class 2 is used for End User SAT PC Programming 3 Password 1 Class 1 can be assigned only by telephone programmin...

Page 309: ...ppendix B Character Codes Section 1 Character Assignment on page B 1 and enter up to eight characters for Setting Data Use the following to enter data H to clear data at cursor 4 Press G to write the data The next Memory Block is displayed 5 Program next Memory Block or press E to go back on line 1 When programmed this assignment creates a directory in the PC after download is performed 2 System S...

Page 310: ...al pad to enter data Agent station number is one of the following H 2 digit 10 89 H 3 digit 100 899 H 4 digit 1000 8999 Default Values Not Specified 4 Press G to write Group and Station No and advance to next Agent number 1 32 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each remaining Agent The next Memory Block is displayed 6 Program next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number M...

Page 311: ...red to assign a 5 6 or 7 digit Master Hunt Number Display R1700 or lower Display R2000 or higher Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK8 BFto access the Memory Block 3 Use dial pad to enter agent station No Use the following to enter data K Ito enter numeric data Jto move cursor left Lto move cursor right Station number is one of the following 2 digit 10 89 3 digit 100 899 4 digit 100...

Page 312: ...l the voice mail ETU in the KSU 5 Turn the KSU power ON 5 Program next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 1 46 Access Code 1 Digit Assignment 1 1 47 Access Code 2 Digit Assignment 1 1 48 Access Code 3 Digit Assignment 1 2 03 2 7 Digit Station Number Selection 1 2 24 Intercom Feature Access Code Assignment 1 2 34 Expanded Station Number Ass...

Page 313: ...4 Press G to write the data The next Memory Block is displayed 5 Program next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 1 46 48 Access Code 1 2 3 Digit Assignment Function 146 Forced Account Code Authorization Code Function 147 Forced Account Code Authorization Code Access 1 8 07 Class of Service Attendant Feature Selection 1 Page 2 LK 8 Forced A...

Page 314: ...__________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ 4 64 Code Restriction Class Without Authorization Code Day Mode Assignment 4 65 Code Restriction Class Without Authorization Code Night Mode Assignment Related Programming Continued M B Number Memory Block Name ...

Page 315: ... off line 2 Press LK1 LK8 BIto access the Memory Block 3 Use dial pad to enter an extension number Use the following to enter data K Ito enter digits Jto move cursor left Lto move cursor right Setting Data 2 4 digits Default Values Not Assigned 4 Press G to write the data and advance to next Group No 1 4 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each remaining Group No The next Memory Block is displayed 6 Progra...

Page 316: ...ory Block 3 Use dial pad to enter Grp 1 4 and the Setting Data station number for each agent Use the following to enter data K Ito enter digits Jto move cursor left Lto move cursor right Setting Data Maximum of 4 digits Default Values Not Assigned 4 Press G to write the data and select the next Agent No 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each remaining Agent No The next Memory Block is displayed 6 Program...

Page 317: ... 4 The shaded selection is the default INT EXT Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK8 CAto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the MOH source Default Values INT 4 Press G to write the data The next Memory Block is displayed 5 Program next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 8 09 Music On...

Page 318: ... 6 dB Display Settings LK 1 LK 2 The shaded selection is the default 0dB 6dB Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK8 CBto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the dB setting Default ValuesDefault Values 0 dB 4 Press G to write the data The next Memory Block is displayed 5 Program next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming...

Page 319: ...ch on the CPU to reset the system Display Example 1 Elite 100 is Master Clock Source Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK8 CCto access the Memory Block 3 Use dial pad to enter number of digits Use the following to enter data K Ito enter digits Jto move cursor left Lto move cursor right Default Values Cabinet 0 Master System 4 Press G to write the data The next Memory Block is displa...

Page 320: ...When ISDN T1 or ISDN T1 and Wireless trunks are installed confirm that Switch SW1 is set to the proper position on the CLKG U Unit ISDN PHS and assign this Memory Block for proper Master Clock setting 2 When only Wireless is installed No ISDN T1 this Memory Block should be left at the default setting Electra Elite Electra Elite Electra Elite DTI Cabinet 1 Slot 1 DTI Cabinet 1 Slot 1 DTI Cabinet 1 ...

Page 321: ...emory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to select the baud rate for each COM port Default Values COM 1 38 4 COM 2 4 8 COM 3 9 6 4 Press G to write the data and advance to the next COM port 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each remaining COM port The next Memory Block is displayed 6 Program next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 5 ...

Page 322: ...2 Press LK1 LK8 CFto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to select the parity and stop bit setting Default Values COM 1 Non 1 COM 2 Non 1 COM 3 Non 1 4 Press G to write the data and advance to the next COM port 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each remaining COM port The next Memory Block is displayed 6 Program next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Program...

Page 323: ...is the default NO YS Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK8 CGto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to specify whether or not relay 0 is used Default Values NO 4 Press G to write the data and advance to relay 1 5 Press G to write the data for relay 1 The next Memory Block is displayed 6 Program next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Pro...

Page 324: ...or the socket modem Display Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK8 CHto access the Memory Block 3 Use dial pad to enter number of digits Use the following to enter data K Ito enter digits Jto move cursor left Lto move cursor right Setting Data maximum of 4 digits Default Values Not assigned 4 Press G to write the data The next Memory Block is displayed 5 Program next Memory Block or ...

Page 325: ...election is the default 10s 20s 30s 60s 120s 240s No Limit Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK8 DKto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to assign the value Default Values 10 seconds 4 Press G to write the data The next Memory Block is displayed 5 Program next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1...

Page 326: ...te Advance Block that connects to the Main Office is assigned System Software R2000 or higher is required to select a Trunk Group or Route Advance Block Display Settings LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK8 The shaded selection is the default CO PBX No TG RAB No Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK8 DCto access the Memory Block 3 Press Line Key to select CO PBX No or TG RAB No Use...

Page 327: ...nced 911 CESID to Station Table Assignment 1 Only one CAMA or ISDN PRI trunk can be assigned per system 2 The E911 trunk can be connected to a COI 4 8 U COID 4 8 U COIB 4 U or COIB 8 U ETU CAMA trunk support is provided on COIB 4 U20 port 3 or COIB 8 U10 ports 3 and 7 only Other COI ETUs support CAMA trunks on all ports 3 Information provided to the E911 system is called Caller Emergency Service I...

Page 328: ...a Use the following to enter data K Ito enter numeric data Jto move cursor left Lto move the cursor right H to Clear Data Setting Data Not Specified No Alternate Route default 101 132 Trunk Group 01 32 201 232 Route Advance Block 01 32 4 Press G to write the data The next Memory Block is displayed 5 Program next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block...

Page 329: ...Block 3 Use the dial pad to enter data Use the following to enter data K Ito enter numeric data Jto move cursor left Lto move the cursor right H to Clear Data Setting Data Default Trunk Group 01 101 132 Trunk Group 01 32 Default 101 for Trunk Group 01 201 232 Route Advance Block 01 32 4 Press G to write the data The next Memory Block is displayed 5 Program next Memory Block or press E to go back o...

Page 330: ...________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ Notes 1 When the E911 trunk is maintenance busy or trouble out of service E911 calls are routed to the trunk group assigned by E911 Alternate Route Assignment 2 One trunk group or one route advance block per system can be specified ...

Page 331: ...g Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK8 DFto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to assign the value 4 Press G to write the data The next Memory Block is displayed 5 Program next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 8 43 Enhanced 911 Trunk Assignment 1 8 44 Enhanced 911 Alternate Route Assignment 1 8 45 Enhan...

Page 332: ...Memory Block 3 Enter Setting Data using the dial pad Use the following Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data 2 Digit CAR 10 89 3 Digit CAR 100 899 4 Digit CAR 1000 8999 H to clear all data when cursor is at setting position Default Values Not Specified 4 Press G to write the data Memory Block 1 1 00 is displayed 5 Press E to go back on line Related Programming...

Page 333: ...ures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK8 DHto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the setting option 4 Press G to write the selected data and display Memory Block 1 8 00 5 Press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 1 27 Automatic Day Night Mode Switching Time Assignment 1 1 32 Automatic Day Night Mode Switching by Day of Week Ass...

Page 334: ... For external digital Voice Mail Systems and VP CTI Systems this Memory Block must be set to NO Refer to Table 2 1 Voice Mail AA Info Settings R2000 or higher is required Display Settings LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default NO YS Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK8 DIto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to cha...

Page 335: ...gs DOS Based Voice Mails Hardware Type Voice Mail Q Revision Correct AA Info Type EliteMail U10 U20 FMS Q26031 or lower VMS Q30931 or lower OLD EliteMail U20 U30 ALL CMS FMS Q05631 or higher VMS Q00631 or higher NEW CMS U30 Q11131 or higher NEW FMS U30 Q21131 or higher NEW VMS U30 Q31131 or higher NEW VMP U30 40 Q21631 Q50131 G51231 or higher NEW Linux Based Voice Mails EliteMail CTI LX Lite VMP U...

Page 336: ... 027 030 032 034 140 145 1 1 48 Access Code 3 Digit Assignment Functions 020 025 027 030 032 034 140 145 1 2 24 Intercom Feature Access Code Assignment Function 007 1 8 08 Class of Service Station Feature Selection 2 Page 1 LK1 and LK5 Page 3 LK3 ON OFF Page 6 LK2 1 8 26 Voice Mail Quick Transfer Master Hunt Number 4 10 Station Number Assignment 4 14 Intercom Master Hunt Number Selection 4 15 Inte...

Page 337: ...ection is the default 10 Park Locations 40 Park Locations Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK8 EAto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option 4 Press G to write the selected data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 6 05 Attenda...

Page 338: ...ber or cycle back to 1 B 1 2 3 A B or C for Port Number ID Buffer Number 01 99 A0 A9 B0 B9 C0 4 Press G to write the data Memory Block 1 9 02 is displayed 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each remaining sequential ID Buffer No displayed after each password choice is made in Memory Block 1 9 02 1 Assign 000 No Data for stations that are not installed or stations that are denied DISA access 2 This Memory ...

Page 339: ...D codes are assigned and then cycles back to ID Buffer No 1 Programming does not automatically cycle to Memory Block 1 10 00 Display Settings Related Programming Refer to individual features in the Electra Elite IPK Features and Specifications Manual LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default NO YS Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK9 JBto access th...

Page 340: ... Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK10 to access the Memory Block Default Values All RABS 2 3 Enter data using the dial pad Use the following to enter data JandLto move the cursor K Ito enter data D to select next RAB No Setting Data 4 Press G to write the data The next Memory Block is displayed 5 Program Memory Blocks 1 10 01 09 RAB 2 for this Memory Block is displayed 6 Repeat steps 3 4 and 5 for all RAB...

Page 341: ...Network ID Assignment 1 10 05 Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment Service 1 10 06 Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment Feature 1 10 07 Call by Call Service Parameter Assignment 1 10 08 Call by Call Max Digit Assignment 1 10 09 Call by Call Simulated Facility Group Assignment 1 10 20 Call by Call Outgoing SFG Assignment 1 10 21 Call by Call Outgoing Incoming SFG Assignment 1 10 2...

Page 342: ...ied Facility Information Element when making outgoing calls Display Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK10 JAto access the Memory Block Default Values All RABs 01 3 Enter data using the dial pad Use the following to enter data JandLto move the cursor K Ito enter data D to select next RAB No Setting Data 4 Press G to write the data The next Memory Block is displayed 5 Program the nex...

Page 343: ...all by Call Network ID Assignment 1 10 05 Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment Service 1 10 06 Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment Feature 1 10 07 Call by Call Service Parameter Assignment 1 10 08 Call by Call Max Digit Assignment 1 10 09 Call by Call Simulated Facility Group Assignment 1 10 20 Call by Call Outgoing SFG Assignment 1 10 21 Call by Call Outgoing Incoming SFG Assig...

Page 344: ...ormation Element when making outgoing calls Display Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK10 JBto access the Memory Block Default Values All RABs 0 3 Enter data using the dial pad Use the following to enter data JandLto move the cursor K Ito enter data D to select next RAB No Setting Data 4 Press G to write the data The next Memory Block is displayed 5 Program the next Memory Block or...

Page 345: ...by Call Network ID Assignment 1 10 05 Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment Service 1 10 06 Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment Feature 1 10 07 Call by Call Service Parameter Assignment 1 10 08 Call by Call Max Digit Assignment 1 10 09 Call by Call Simulated Facility Group Assignment 1 10 20 Call by Call Outgoing SFG Assignment 1 10 21 Call by Call Outgoing Incoming SFG Assignmen...

Page 346: ...n Element when making outgoing calls Display Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK10 JCto access the Memory Block Default Values All RABs 00 3 Enter data using the dial pad Use the following to enter data JandLto move the cursor K Ito enter data D to select next RAB No Setting Data 4 Press G to write the data The next Memory Block is displayed 5 Program the next Memory Block or press...

Page 347: ...y Call Network ID Assignment 1 10 05 Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment Service 1 10 06 Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment Feature 1 10 07 Call by Call Service Parameter Assignment 1 10 08 Call by Call Max Digit Assignment 1 10 09 Call by Call Simulated Facility Group Assignment 1 10 20 Call by Call Outgoing SFG Assignment 1 10 21 Call by Call Outgoing Incoming SFG Assignment...

Page 348: ...a using the dial pad Use the following to enter data JandLto move the cursor K Ito enter data D to select next RAB No H to clear Setting Data 4 Press G to write the data The next Memory Block is displayed 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 3 03 Trunk to Trunk Group Assignment 1 1 30 Route Advance Block Assignment 1 1 46 47...

Page 349: ...ent 1 10 20 Call by Call Outgoing SFG Assignment 1 10 21 Call by Call Outgoing Incoming SFG Assignment 1 10 22 Call by Call Incoming Type Selection 1 13 03 Call by Call Service Selection 4 12 Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode 1 Call by Call Type of Network ID Assignment Memory Block 1 10 00 and ID Plan Assignment Memory Block 1 10 01 are sent to the network only when Network ID Assignment is m...

Page 350: ...s 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK10 JEto access the Memory Block Default Values All RABs 00 None 3 Enter three or four digit data using the dial pad Use the following to enter data JandLto move the cursor K Ito enter data D to select next RAB No Setting Data System Mode 1 Submode 10 Data No 05 PC Programming AY 0 1 0 5 F C V S 0 0 T I M E D I S P L A Y Data No Setting Data RAB 01 32 Title PRT ETU SW1...

Page 351: ...f Network ID Assignment 1 10 01 Call by Call ID Plan Assignment 1 10 02 Call by Call Type of Number Assignment 1 10 03 Call by Call Numbering Plan ID Assignment 1 10 04 Call by Call Network ID Assignment 1 10 06 Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment Feature 1 10 07 Call by Call Service Parameter Assignment 1 10 08 Call by Call Max Digit Assignment 1 10 09 Call by Call Simulated Facility Gr...

Page 352: ... calls Display Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK10 JFto access the Memory Block 3 Enter three or four digit data using the dial pad Use the following to enter data JandLto move the cursor K Ito enter data D to select next RAB No Setting Data Default Values All RABs 00 4 Press G to write the data The next Memory Block is displayed 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go b...

Page 353: ...n Assignment 1 10 02 Call by Call Type of Number Assignment 1 10 03 Call by Call Numbering Plan ID Assignment 1 10 04 Call by Call Network ID Assignment 1 10 05 Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment Service 1 10 07 Call by Call Service Parameter Assignment 1 10 08 Call by Call Max Digit Assignment 1 10 09 Call by Call Simulated Facility Group Assignment 1 10 20 Call by Call Outgoing SFG As...

Page 354: ...assigned when subscribing with the carrier for the different services Display Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK10 JGto access the Memory Block 3 Enter 1 5 digits for Setting Data using the dial pad Use the following to enter data JandLto move the cursor K Ito enter data D to select next RAB No Setting Data No 1 0 or 1 for each entry Setting Data No 2 Three digit code 000 127 for ...

Page 355: ...Call ID Plan Assignment 1 10 02 Call by Call Type of Number Assignment 1 10 03 Call by Call Numbering Plan ID Assignment 1 10 04 Call by Call Network ID Assignment 1 10 05 Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment Service 1 10 06 Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment Feature 1 10 08 Call by Call Max Digit Assignment 1 10 09 Call by Call Simulated Facility Group Assignment 1 10 20 Call ...

Page 356: ...ove the cursor K Ito enter data D to select next RAB No Setting Data 00 No Limit 01 24 digits Default Values All RABs 00 No Limit 4 Press G to write the data The next Memory Block is displayed 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 3 03 Trunk to Trunk Group Assignment 1 1 30 Route Advance Block Assignment 1 1 46 47 48 Access C...

Page 357: ...Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment Feature 1 10 07 Call by Call Service Parameter Assignment 1 10 09 Call by Call Simulated Facility Group Assignment 1 10 20 Call by Call Outgoing SFG Assignment 1 10 21 Call by Call Outgoing Incoming SFG Assignment 1 10 22 Call by Call Incoming Type Selection 1 13 03 Call by Call Service Selection 4 12 Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode Related Progr...

Page 358: ...No Setting Data 00 Not Specified 01 16 Default Values All RABs 00 4 Press G to write the data The next RAB for Memory Block 1 10 00 is displayed After data for RAB 32 is entered SFG 1 for Memory Block 1 10 20 is displayed 5 Program Memory Block 1 10 20 or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 3 03 Trunk to Trunk Group Assignment 1 1 30 Route Advance Block Assi...

Page 359: ...vice 1 10 06 Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment Feature 1 10 07 Call by Call Service Parameter Assignment 1 10 08 Call by Call Max Digit Assignment 1 10 20 Call by Call Outgoing SFG Assignment 1 10 21 Call by Call Outgoing Incoming SFG Assignment 1 10 22 Call by Call Incoming Type Selection 1 13 03 Call by Call Service Selection 4 12 Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode This Memory Blo...

Page 360: ...xt SFG No Setting Data 01 64 99 Not Specified Default Values All SFGs 99 4 Press G to write the data The next Memory Block is displayed 5 Program Memory Blocks 1 10 21 and 1 10 22 The next SFG is displayed 6 Repeat Steps 3 4 and 5 for each SFG After SFG 16 data is programmed RAB 1 of Memory Block 1 10 00 is displayed 7 Program the cycle again or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B N...

Page 361: ...signment 1 10 05 Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment Service 1 10 06 Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment Feature 1 10 07 Call by Call Service Parameter Assignment 1 10 08 Call by Call Max Digit Assignment 1 10 09 Call by Call Simulated Facility Group Assignment 1 10 21 Call by Call Outgoing Incoming SFG Assignment 1 10 22 Call by Call Incoming Type Selection 1 13 03 Call by Cal...

Page 362: ...ata JandLto move the cursor K Ito enter data D to select next SFG No Setting Data 01 64 99 Not Specified Default Values All SFGs 99 4 Press G to write the data The next Memory Block is displayed 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 3 03 Trunk to Trunk Group Assignment 1 1 30 Route Advance Block Assignment 1 1 46 47 48 Access...

Page 363: ...ing Value Assignment Service 1 10 06 Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment Feature 1 10 07 Call by Call Service Parameter Assignment 1 10 08 Call by Call Max Digit Assignment 1 10 09 Call by Call Simulated Facility Group Assignment 1 10 20 Call by Call Outgoing SFG Assignment 1 10 22 Call by Call Incoming Type Selection 1 13 03 Call by Call Service Selection 4 12 Line Key Selection for Tel...

Page 364: ...ollowing to enter data JandLto move the cursor D to select next RAB No 4 Press G to write the data The next SFG for Memory Block 1 10 20 is displayed The SFG Memory Block 1 10 20 22 cycle is repeated until the data for SFG 16 is entered RAB 1 is displayed for Memory Block 1 10 00 5 Press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 3 03 Trunk to Trunk Group Assignment 1 1 ...

Page 365: ... 10 06 Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment Feature 1 10 07 Call by Call Service Parameter Assignment 1 10 08 Call by Call Max Digit Assignment 1 10 09 Call by Call Simulated Facility Group Assignment 1 10 20 Call by Call Outgoing SFG Assignment 1 10 21 Call by Call Outgoing Incoming SFG Assignment 1 13 03 Call by Call Service Selection Refer to individual features in the Electra Elite IP...

Page 366: ...7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default 12 SF 24 ESF Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK11 to access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option Setting Data SF Superframe Format 12 Multiframe ESF Extended Superframe Format 24 Multiframe 4 Press G to write the data The next Memory Block is displayed 5 Program the next Memory Block or pres...

Page 367: ... clock signal for the CLKG U Unit Display Settings Notes LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default ZCS B8ZS Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK11 KAto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option 4 Press G to write the data The next Memory Block is displayed 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E t...

Page 368: ...ction is the default 1 0 131 2 132 262 3 263 393 4 394 524 5 525 655 Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK11 KBto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option 4 Press G to write the data The next Memory Block is displayed 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 7 1 Ca...

Page 369: ...is displayed 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 7 1 Card Interface Slot Assignment 1 15 05 Destination Point Code Transfer Assignment 1 15 06 Originating Office Code Number Assignment 1 15 07 K CCIS Message Response Timeout Assignment 1 15 08 Link Reconnect Allow Deny Selection 1 15 09 K CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop As...

Page 370: ...gnment 1 15 17 Centralized BLF Send Time Assignment 1 15 18 Centralized BLF Display Extension Number Assignment 1 The IAD 8 U ETU is programmed as a DTI DTI4 or DTI8 ETU in Memory Block 7 1 Card Interface Slot Assignment when used for K CCIS over IP 2 Assign this Memory Block to YS when IAD 8 U ETUs are installed with one of the following applications loaded IP CCH ETU IP K CCIS IP CCH ETU for NEA...

Page 371: ... Default Values DTI No 1 Channels 01 24 Off DTI No 2 Channels 01 24 Off DTI No 3 Channels 01 24 Off DTI No 4 Channels 01 24 Off DTI No 5 Channels 01 24 Off DTI No 6 Channels 01 24 Off DTI No 7 Channels 01 24 Off DTI No 8 Channels 01 24 Off 4 Press G to write the data The next Memory Block is displayed 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line System Mode 1 Submode 11 Data No 05...

Page 372: ...____________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ Notes Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 7 1 Card Interface Slot Assignment The DTI U ETU must be assigned in the system to set this Memory Block ...

Page 373: ...mming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK11 KFto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option 4 Press G to write data and advance to the next Channel No 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each Channel No The next Memory Block is displayed 6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 11 07...

Page 374: ...e shaded selection is the default CO E M DID ANI Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK11 KGto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option Use dial pad keys to change DTI Number 01 08 4 Press G to write the data The next Memory Block is displayed 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line System Mode 1 Submode 11 Data ...

Page 375: ... B Number Memory Block Name 1 11 06 Signaling Selection 7 1 Card Interface Slot Assignment 1 A DTI U ETU must be assigned in the system to set this Memory Block 2 When the default setting is changed to E M or DID the affected trunks are automatically reassigned to Trunk Group 00 When trunks 01 08 are affected default line key assignment for all Multiline Terminals changes to Not Used and must also...

Page 376: ...the Memory Block Default Values 2 3 Use the dial pad to enter Setting Data 1 and Setting Data 2 Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter data KA KCto change DTI Number Setting Data 1 Setting Data 2 0 No Delete 1 9 Number of Digits to Delete 4 Press G to write the data Memory Block 1 11 00 is displayed System Mode 1 Submode 11 Data No 08 PC Prog...

Page 377: ...ment Revision 4 Electra Elite IPK Notes 5 Program Memory Block 1 11 00 again or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 7 1 Card interface Slot Assignment 1 11 05 T1 Channel Selection 1 11 07 DTI Trunk Type Assignment Example of ANI information KP009727517645STKP7100ST 00 Information digits 9727517645 ANI information 7100 DNIS Digits Programming Procedures ...

Page 378: ...move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data Setting Data Pilot No 2 digit 10 89 3 digit 100 899 4 digit 1000 8999 Default Values Not Specified 4 Press G to write the data The next Memory Block is displayed 5 Program Memory Block 1 12 01 and 1 12 02 The next Group No is displayed 6 Repeat Steps 3 4 and 5 for each Group No After Group 4 is programmed Group 1 for Memory Bl...

Page 379: ..._____________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ Document Revision 4 Electra Elite IPK 1 8 25 ACD UCD Group Agent Assignment 1 12 01 ACD UCD Group Overflow Destination Assignment Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name ...

Page 380: ...Memory Block 3 Enter data using the dial pad The following are used when entering data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data Setting Data Station No 2 digit 10 89 3 digit 100 899 4 digit 1000 8999 Default Values Not Specified 4 Press G to write the data The next Memory Block is displayed 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Pro...

Page 381: ..._____________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ Document Revision 4 Electra Elite IPK Notes 1 An ACD UCD Group Pilot Number cannot be programmed as the overflow destination 2 UCD and ACD cannot be installed in the same system ...

Page 382: ...line 2 Press LK1 LK12 JBto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option 4 Press G to write the data The next Group No for Memory Block 1 12 00 is displayed 5 Program Memory Blocks 1 12 00 02 for each Group No After Group No 4 is programmed Group No 1 for Memory Block 1 12 00 is displayed again 6 Press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Numbe...

Page 383: ...__________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ Document Revision 4 Electra Elite IPK THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 384: ... LK 8 Channel 9 Channel 10 Channel 11 Channel 12 Channel 13 Channel 14 Channel 15 Channel 16 Page 3 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 Channel 17 Channel 18 Channel 19 Channel 20 Channel 21 Channel 22 Channel 23 Channel 24 CO PBX Line LED Off On The shaded selection is the default Data No Not Assigned Yes Assigned Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK13 to access the Memory Bloc...

Page 385: ...5 PRT B Channel to Trunk Group Assignment 1 Only 16 Channels can be assigned with the Elite IPK Basic Port Package 1 UP to eight PRT ETUs can be assigned 2 PRT 1 U firmware version 4 0 or higher is required for individual channel assignment 3 When the PRT 1 U has firmware version 3 6 or lower available channels are Channel 1 to the last channel assigned in this Memory Block 4 The number of availab...

Page 386: ...24 Multiframe depends on the channel service unit demarcation CSU D mark equipment being used Display Settings LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default 12 SF 24 ESF Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK13 KAto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option 4 Press G to write the data The next Memory Block...

Page 387: ..._______________________________________________ Document Revision 4 Electra Elite IPK Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 7 1 Card interface Slot Assignment 1 13 01 PRT Signal Format Selection 1 13 03 Call by Call Service Selection 1 13 04 PRT B Channel Outgoing Priority Selection 1 13 05 PRT B Channel to Trunk Group Assignment ...

Page 388: ...e Time channel to extract a clock signal for the CLKG U Unit Display Settings LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default ZCS B8ZS Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK13 KBto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option 4 Press G to write the data The next Memory Block is displayed 5 Program the next Memo...

Page 389: ... Settings LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default YS NO Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK13 KCto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option 4 Press G to write the data Memory Block 1 13 00 is displayed again 5 Press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 13 00 PRT...

Page 390: ...to Low L H Low to High Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK13 KDto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option 4 Press G to write the data The next Memory Block is displayed 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 7 1 Card Interface Slot Assignment 1 13 00 PRT Chann...

Page 391: ...ed in the same PRI span or for a tenant application where multiple tenants share the PRI span and separation of B channels is required Display Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK13 KEto access the Memory Block 3 Use dial pad keys to enter Trunk Group Use the following to enter data Jto move cursor left Lto move cursor right K Ito enter numeric data 00 is No Trunk Group 01 32 are Tr...

Page 392: ... 1 13 03 Call by Call Service Selection 1 13 04 PRT B Channel Outgoing Priority Selection 3 03 Trunk to Trunk Group Assignment 3 91 Trunk Type Selection 1 This Memory Block must be coordinated with Memory Block 3 03 Trunk to Trunk Group Assignment The number of assigned channels must be the same or greater including default than the number of trunks to a trunk group assigned In Memory Block 3 03 F...

Page 393: ...__________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ Document Revision 4 Electra Elite IPK THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 394: ...e Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the Setting Data option 4 Press G to write the data The next Memory Block is displayed 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 3 03 Trunk to Trunk Group Assignment 4 40 LCR Class Selection 1 1 30 Route Advance Block Assignment 1 8 08 Class of Service Station Fea...

Page 395: ... enter data Jto move cursor left Lto move cursor right H to clear setting data Table No 1 4 Table Number is Class number Dial No 01 C8 Setting Data 0 9 J X P N 8 Digit Maximum Operation Data Includes Default Values None 4 Press G to write the data The next Dial No is displayed 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 5 for each Dial No 01 C8 for Table 1 After Dial No C8 is programmed the next Table No is displayed 6 ...

Page 396: ...ogramming M B Number Memory Block Name 3 03 Trunk to Trunk Group Assignment 4 40 LCR Class Selection 1 1 30 Route Advance Block Assignment 1 8 08 Class of Service Station Feature Selection 2 1 14 00 ARS Allow Deny Selection 1 14 02 ARS Dial Allow Deny Selection 1 14 03 ARS Route Table Number Assignment 1 14 04 ARS Trunk Group to Route Number Assignment 1 14 05 ARS Digit Delete Assignment 1 14 06 A...

Page 397: ... the Setting Data option Use the following to enter data K Ito select data Jto move cursor left Lto move cursor right 4 Press G to write the data The next Dial No is displayed 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each Dial No 01 C8 for Table 1 After Dial No C8 is programmed the next Table No is displayed 6 Repeat Programming cycle for each Dial No 01 C8 for Tables 2 4 The next Memory Block is displayed 7 Pr...

Page 398: ...__________________________________________ Notes 1 14 03 ARS Route Table Number Assignment 1 14 04 ARS Trunk Group to Route Number Assignment 1 14 05 ARS Digit Delete Assignment 1 14 06 ARS Digit Add Assignment 1 Entries A0 C8 are 100 128 2 When NO Deny is set the other Memory Blocks for this dialing assignment do not have to be programmed Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name ...

Page 399: ...write the data The next Dial No is displayed 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each Dial No 01 C8 for Table 1 After Dial No C8 is programmed the next table No is displayed 6 Repeat Programming cycle for dial Nos 01 C8 for each Table 1 4 The next Memory Block is displayed 7 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 3 03 Trunk to Trunk Grou...

Page 400: ...______________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ Notes 1 14 06 ARS Digit Add Assignment 1 Entries A0 C8 are 100 128 2 When ARS Route Assignment 00 is selected the call is sent to Trunk Group 01 exactly as it was dialed Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name ...

Page 401: ...ory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the Setting Data 1 option Use the following to enter data K Ito select Data Setting Data 2 Trunk Group Number 01 32 or Setting Data 2 RAB 01 32 Jto move cursor left Lto move cursor right 4 Press G to write the data The next Route No is displayed 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each Route No The next Memory Block is displayed 6 Program the ne...

Page 402: ..._____________ Notes 1 14 01 ARS Dialing Assignment 1 14 02 ARS Dial Allow Deny Selection 1 14 03 ARS Route Table Number Assignment 1 14 05 ARS Digit Delete Assignment 1 14 06 ARS Digit Add Assignment 1 14 07 ARS Max Digit Assignment 1 When NORMAL is selected the call is routed to Trunk Group 1 exactly as dialed 2 ICM is used when the open numbering plan is used K CCIS Related Programming M B Numbe...

Page 403: ...ocedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK14 KEto access the Memory Block 3 Use dial pad keys K Ito select Route No 01 32 and number of digits 00 10 Use the following to enter data Jto move cursor left Lto move cursor right If Setting Data is 00 digits are not deleted 4 Press G to write the data The next Route No is displayed 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each Route No The next Memory Block is displayed 6...

Page 404: ...unk Group Assignment 4 40 LCR Class Selection 1 1 30 Route Advance Block Assignment 1 8 08 Class of Service Station Feature Selection 2 1 14 00 ARS Allow Deny Selection 1 14 01 ARS Dialing Assignment 1 14 02 ARS Dial Allow Deny Selection 1 14 03 ARS Route Table Number Assignment 1 14 04 ARS Trunk Group to Route Number Assignment 1 14 06 ARS Digit Add Assignment 1 14 07 ARS Max Digit Assignment The...

Page 405: ...owing to enter data Jto move cursor left Lto move cursor right B Jto enter J B Lto enter L B Kto enter a pause Default Values Not Specified 4 Press G to write the data The next Route No is displayed 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each Route No Memory Block 1 14 00 is displayed 6 Press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 3 03 Trunk to Trunk Group Assignment 4 40 LCR Cl...

Page 406: ..._______________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ Notes 1 14 04 ARS Trunk Group to Route Number Assignment 1 14 05 ARS Digit Delete Assignment 1 14 07 ARS Max Digit Assignment A maximum of 10 digits can be added to a route assignment Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name ...

Page 407: ...sor left Lto move cursor right K Ito enter numeric data Default Values Length 24 Digits Valid range for setting data 01 99 4 Press G to write the data 5 Press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 3 03 Trunk to Trunk Group Assignment 4 40 LCR Class Selection 1 1 30 Route Advance Block Assignment 1 8 08 Class of Service Station Feature Selection 2 1 14 00 ARS Allow D...

Page 408: ...____________________________________________________________________________ Notes 1 When 00 is set for this Memory Block refer to Memory Block 1 1 81 ISDN K CCIS Interval Time Selection for the time it takes before the message is sent to the K CCIS Network 2 ARS Max Digit Assignment applies to K CCIS Trunk Routes routed through Automatic Route Selection ...

Page 409: ...__________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ Document Revision 4 Electra Elite IPK THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 410: ...O PBX line key to change the Setting Data option 4 Press G to write the data 5 Press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 7 1 Card Interface Slot Assignment 7 3 01 MIF LCR Assignment 7 3 02 MIF SMDR Assignment 1 15 01 Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignment 1 15 02 Common Signal Channel Assignment 1 15 03 Originating Point Code Assignment 1 15 04 Destination Po...

Page 411: ...art Time Selection 1 5 02 SMDR Print Format 1 5 13 Printer Connected Selection 1 5 14 Printer Line Feed Control Selection 1 5 25 SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment 1 5 26 SMDR Incoming Outgoing Print Selection 1 8 35 COM Port Baud Rate Setting Assignment 4 56 SMDR Telephone Print Selection 1 For Electra Elite IPK to Electra Elite IPK Network only one system can be set for Main All other systems must ...

Page 412: ...6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default 64k 56k 48k 1 48k 2 Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK15 KAto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the Setting Data option Two adaptation rates are available with the 48 Kbps data transmission The adaptation method must match the rate adaptation of the clock source office Data format for 48k 1 i...

Page 413: ... 09 K CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Assignment 1 15 10 Calling Name Display Allow Deny Selection 1 15 11 Centralized Billing Allow Deny Selection 1 15 12 Centralized Billing Point Code of Center Office Assignment 1 15 13 Centralized Day Night Switching for Remote Office Assignment 1 15 14 Centralized Day Night Switching for Main Office Assignment 1 15 15 Centralized BLF Send Point Code Assignme...

Page 414: ...umeric data Default Values 00 4 Press G to write the data 5 Press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 7 1 Card Interface Slot Assignment 7 3 01 MIF LCR Assignment 7 3 02 MIF SMDR Assignment 1 15 00 K CCIS Main Remote Office Selection 1 15 01 Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignment 1 15 03 Originating Point Code Assignment 1 15 04 Destination Point Code Assignm...

Page 415: ...e Assignment 1 15 15 Centralized BLF Send Point Code Assignment 1 15 16 Centralized BLF Send Extension Number Assignment 1 15 17 Centralized BLF Send Time Assignment 1 15 18 Centralized BLF Display Extension Number Assignment 3 70 CIC Number Assignment 5 05 Common Signaling Channel Route Selection 1 1 05 Start Time Selection 1 5 02 SMDR Print Format 1 5 13 Printer Connected Selection 1 5 14 Printe...

Page 416: ... right K Ito enter numeric data Point Code Range is 00001 16367 Default Values Blank 4 Press G to write the data 5 Press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 7 1 Card Interface Slot Assignment 7 3 01 MIF LCR Assignment 7 3 02 MIF SMDR Assignment 1 15 00 K CCIS Main Remote Office Selection 1 15 01 Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignment 1 15 02 Common Signal Cha...

Page 417: ...15 15 Centralized BLF Send Point Code Assignment 1 15 16 Centralized BLF Send Extension Number Assignment 1 15 17 Centralized BLF Send Time Assignment 1 15 18 Centralized BLF Display Extension Number Assignment 3 70 CIC Number Assignment 5 05 Common Signaling Channel Route Selection 1 1 05 Start Time Selection 1 5 02 SMDR Print Format 1 5 13 Printer Connected Selection 1 5 14 Printer Line Feed Con...

Page 418: ...r left Lto move cursor right K Ito enter numeric data Point Code Range is 00001 16367 Default Values Blank 4 Press G to write the data 5 Press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 7 1 Card Interface Slot Assignment 7 3 01 MIF LCR Assignment 7 3 02 MIF SMDR Assignment 1 15 00 K CCIS Main Remote Office Selection 1 15 01 Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignment 1 1...

Page 419: ...5 14 Centralized Day Night Switching for Main Office Assignment 1 15 15 Centralized BLF Send Point Code Assignment 1 15 16 Centralized BLF Send Extension Number Assignment 1 15 17 Centralized BLF Send Time Assignment 1 15 18 Centralized BLF Display Extension Number Assignment 3 70 CIC Number Assignment 5 05 Common Signaling Channel Route Selection 1 1 05 Start Time Selection 1 5 02 SMDR Print Form...

Page 420: ...k is used for Centralized K CCIS features With R1500 or higher a CCH Channel i can be assigned for K CCIS over IP Display Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK15 KEto access the Memory Block 3 Use dial pad keys to enter Setting Data Press Redial 1 to assign i for K CCIS over IP for R1500 or higher Use the following to enter data Jto move cursor left Lto move cursor right K Ito enter ...

Page 421: ... 15 00 K CCIS Main Remote Office Selection 1 15 01 Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignment 1 15 02 Common Signal Channel Assignment 1 15 03 Originating Point Code Assignment 1 15 04 Destination Point Code Assignment 1 15 06 Originating Office Code Number Assignment 1 15 07 K CCIS Message Response Timeout Assignment 1 15 08 Link Reconnect Allow Deny Selection 1 15 09 K CCIS Maximum Call Forward...

Page 422: ... Assignment 1 15 18 Centralized BLF Display Extension Number Assignment 3 70 CIC Number Assignment 5 05 Common Signaling Channel Route Selection 1 1 05 Start Time Selection 1 5 02 SMDR Print Format 1 5 13 Printer Connected Selection 1 5 14 Printer Line Feed Control Selection 1 5 25 SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment 1 5 26 SMDR Incoming Outgoing Print Selection 1 8 35 COM Port Baud Rate Setting Assig...

Page 423: ...to move cursor left Lto move cursor right K Ito enter numeric data The Maximum Office Code Number can have four digits and should include the Access Code for the open numbering plan Valid range is 0 9999 Default Values Blank 4 Press G to write the data 5 Press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 7 1 Card Interface Slot Assignment 7 3 01 MIF LCR Assignment 7 3 02 M...

Page 424: ...d Day Night Switching for Remote Office Assignment 1 15 14 Centralized Day Night Switching for Main Office Assignment 1 15 15 Centralized BLF Send Point Code Assignment 1 15 16 Centralized BLF Send Extension Number Assignment 1 15 17 Centralized BLF Send Time Assignment 1 15 18 Centralized BLF Display Extension Number Assignment 3 70 CIC Number Assignment 5 05 Common Signaling Channel Route Select...

Page 425: ... enter Setting data Use the following to enter data Use Jto move cursor left Use Lto move cursor right Use K Ito enter numeric data Setting Data 00 Infinity 01 99 Seconds are valid times Default Values 30 Seconds 4 Press G to write the data 5 Press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 7 1 Card Interface Slot Assignment 7 3 01 MIF LCR Assignment 7 3 02 MIF SMDR Assi...

Page 426: ... 1 15 14 Centralized Day Night Switching for Main Office Assignment 1 15 15 Centralized BLF Send Point Code Assignment 1 15 16 Centralized BLF Send Extension Number Assignment 1 15 17 Centralized BLF Send Time Assignment 1 15 18 Centralized BLF Display Extension Number Assignment 3 70 CIC Number Assignment 5 05 Common Signaling Channel Route Selection 1 1 05 Start Time Selection 1 5 02 SMDR Print ...

Page 427: ...X line key to change the option 4 Press G to write the data 5 Press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 7 1 Card Interface Slot Assignment 7 3 01 MIF LCR Assignment 7 3 02 MIF SMDR Assignment 1 15 00 K CCIS Main Remote Office Selection 1 15 01 Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignment 1 15 02 Common Signal Channel Assignment 1 15 03 Originating Point Code Assign...

Page 428: ... Extension Number Assignment 1 15 17 Centralized BLF Send Time Assignment 1 15 18 Centralized BLF Display Extension Number Assignment 3 70 CIC Number Assignment 5 05 Common Signaling Channel Route Selection 1 1 05 Start Time Selection 1 5 02 SMDR Print Format 1 5 13 Printer Connected Selection 1 5 14 Printer Line Feed Control Selection 1 5 25 SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment 1 5 26 SMDR Incoming Ou...

Page 429: ...ing to enter data Jto move cursor left Lto move cursor right K Ito enter numeric data Default Values 5 Range 1 7 4 Press G to write the data 5 Press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 7 1 Card Interface Slot Assignment 7 3 01 MIF LCR Assignment 7 3 02 MIF SMDR Assignment 1 15 00 K CCIS Main Remote Office Selection 1 15 01 Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignme...

Page 430: ...d Day Night Switching for Main Office Assignment 1 15 15 Centralized BLF Send Point Code Assignment 1 15 16 Centralized BLF Send Extension Number Assignment 1 15 17 Centralized BLF Send Time Assignment 1 15 18 Centralized BLF Display Extension Number Assignment 3 70 CIC Number Assignment 5 05 Common Signaling Channel Route Selection 1 1 05 Start Time Selection 1 5 02 SMDR Print Format 1 5 13 Print...

Page 431: ...to access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the option 4 Press G to write the data 5 Press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 7 1 Card Interface Slot Assignment 7 3 01 MIF LCR Assignment 7 3 02 MIF SMDR Assignment 1 15 00 K CCIS Main Remote Office Selection 1 15 01 Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignment 1 15 02 Common Signa...

Page 432: ...e Assignment 1 15 15 Centralized BLF Send Point Code Assignment 1 15 16 Centralized BLF Send Extension Number Assignment 1 15 17 Centralized BLF Send Time Assignment 1 15 18 Centralized BLF Display Extension Number Assignment 3 70 CIC Number Assignment 5 05 Common Signaling Channel Route Selection 1 1 05 Start Time Selection 1 5 02 SMDR Print Format 1 5 13 Printer Connected Selection 1 5 14 Printe...

Page 433: ...tion is the default Deny NO Allow YS Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK15 AAto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the Setting Data option 4 Press G to write the data 5 Press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 7 1 Card Interface Slot Assignment 7 3 01 MIF LCR Assignment 7 3 02 MIF SMDR Assignment 1 15 00 K ...

Page 434: ...1 15 14 Centralized Day Night Switching for Main Office Assignment 1 15 15 Centralized BLF Send Point Code Assignment 1 15 16 Centralized BLF Send Extension Number Assignment 1 15 17 Centralized BLF Send Time Assignment 1 15 18 Centralized BLF Display Extension Number Assignment 3 70 CIC Number Assignment 5 05 Common Signaling Channel Route Selection 1 1 05 Start Time Selection 1 5 02 SMDR Print F...

Page 435: ...de Use the following to enter data Jto move cursor left Lto move cursor right K Ito enter numeric data Point code range is 00001 16367 Default Values Blank 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 7 1 Card Interface Slot Assignment 7 3 01 MIF LCR Assignment 7 3 02 MIF SMDR Assignment 1 15 00 K CCIS M...

Page 436: ...ignment 1 15 15 Centralized BLF Send Point Code Assignment 1 15 16 Centralized BLF Send Extension Number Assignment 1 15 17 Centralized BLF Send Time Assignment 1 15 18 Centralized BLF Display Extension Number Assignment 3 70 CIC Number Assignment 5 05 Common Signaling Channel Route Selection 1 1 05 Start Time Selection 1 5 02 SMDR Print Format 1 5 13 Printer Connected Selection 1 5 14 Printer Lin...

Page 437: ...ACto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the Setting Data option 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 7 1 Card Interface Slot Assignment 7 3 01 MIF LCR Assignment 7 3 02 MIF SMDR Assignment 1 15 00 K CCIS Main Remote Office ...

Page 438: ... Point Code Assignment 1 15 16 Centralized BLF Send Extension Number Assignment 1 15 17 Centralized BLF Send Time Assignment 1 15 18 Centralized BLF Display Extension Number Assignment 3 70 CIC Number Assignment 5 05 Common Signaling Channel Route Selection 1 1 05 Start Time Selection 1 5 02 SMDR Print Format 1 5 13 Printer Connected Selection 1 5 14 Printer Line Feed Control Selection 1 5 25 SMDR...

Page 439: ...Channel and Point Code Press Redial 1 to assign i for K CCIS over IP R1500 or higher Use the following to enter data Jto move cursor left Lto move cursor right K Ito enter numeric data Point code range is 00001 16367 Tables 01 16 can be assigned Default Values All Tables Not Specified 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each table The next Memor...

Page 440: ...zed Day Night Switching for Remote Office Assignment 1 15 15 Centralized BLF Send Point Code Assignment 1 15 16 Centralized BLF Send Extension Number Assignment 1 15 17 Centralized BLF Send Time Assignment 1 15 18 Centralized BLF Display Extension Number Assignment 3 70 CIC Number Assignment 5 05 Common Signaling Channel Route Selection 1 1 05 Start Time Selection 1 5 02 SMDR Print Format 1 5 13 P...

Page 441: ...e Press Redial 1 to assign i for K CCIS over IP R1500 or higher Use the following to enter data Jto move cursor left Lto move cursor right K Ito enter numeric data Point code range is 00001 16367 Group No 1 8 can be assigned Default Values All Tables Not Specified 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each Group No 6 Program the next Memory Block ...

Page 442: ...nt 1 15 10 Calling Name Display Allow Deny Selection 1 15 11 Centralized Billing Allow Deny Selection 1 15 12 Centralized Billing Point Code of Center Office Assignment 1 15 13 Centralized Day Night Switching for Remote Office Assignment 1 15 14 Centralized Day Night Switching for Main Office Assignment 1 15 16 Centralized BLF Send Extension Number Assignment 1 15 17 Centralized BLF Send Time Assi...

Page 443: ... Group 8 Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK15 AFto access the Memory Block 3 Use dial pad keys to enter Table number and Extension No Use the following to enter data Jto move cursor left Lto move cursor right K Ito enter numeric data Three Digit Extension Number 100 899 Four Digit Extension Number 1000 8999 Tables 001 120 can be assigned Default Values All Tables Not Specified 4 P...

Page 444: ...er Office Assignment 1 15 13 Centralized Day Night Switching for Remote Office Assignment 1 15 14 Centralized Day Night Switching for Main Office Assignment 1 15 15 Centralized BLF Send Extension Number Assignment 1 15 17 Centralized BLF Send Time Assignment 1 15 18 Centralized BLF Display Extension Number Assignment 3 70 CIC Number Assignment 4 12 Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode 4 17 Statio...

Page 445: ...6s Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK15 AGto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the Setting Data option 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 7 1 Card Interface Slot Assignment 7 3 01 MIF LCR Assignment 7 3 ...

Page 446: ... Center Office Assignment 1 15 13 Centralized Day Night Switching for Remote Office Assignment 1 15 14 Centralized Day Night Switching for Main Office Assignment 1 15 15 Centralized BLF Send Point Code Assignment 1 15 16 Centralized BLF Send Extension Number Assignment 1 15 18 Centralized BLF Display Extension Number Assignment 3 70 CIC Number Assignment 4 12 Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode ...

Page 447: ...ta Jto move cursor left Lto move cursor right K Ito enter numeric data Setting data includes Three Digit Extension Numbers 100 899 Four Digit Extension Numbers 1000 8999 Tables 001 120 Default Values All Tables Not Specified 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each Table No 6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Pr...

Page 448: ...y Selection 1 15 11 Centralized Billing Allow Deny Selection 1 15 12 Centralized Billing Point Code of Center Office Assignment 1 15 13 Centralized Day Night Switching for Remote Office Assignment 1 15 14 Centralized Day Night Switching for Main Office Assignment 1 15 15 Centralized BLF Send Point Code Assignment 1 15 16 Centralized BLF Send Extension Number Assignment 1 15 17 Centralized BLF Send...

Page 449: ...lection is the default NO Deny YS Allow Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK15 AIto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the Setting Data option 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 8 43 Enhanced 911 Trunk As...

Page 450: ...________________________________________________________ Notes 1 Assign this Memory Block to YS Allow at the Main Office and all tandem offices to allow the Calling Party Number to be sent out on the CAMA or an ISDN PRI trunk when a 911 call is received from a remote K CCIS system 2 This system data must be set at the Main Office and any tandem office that passes E911 calls ...

Page 451: ...K 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default STA Station No CESID CES ID Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK15 BKto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the Setting Data option 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Progra...

Page 452: ...ion When the main office is a NEAX2000 or Electra Elite IPK this data is set to CES ID When the main office is a NEAX2400 this data is set to Station Number 2 This system data is used at remote offices only 3 This Memory Block is used when the following K CCIS features are used Centralized E911 K CCIS Calling Party Number CPN Presentation from Station Information 4 Use Memory Block 4 54 Enhanced 9...

Page 453: ...LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default NO Deny YS Allow Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK15 BAto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the Setting Data option 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name ...

Page 454: ...k RAB assigned in Memory Block 1 8 44 When an RAB is assigned in Memory Block 1 8 43 and a Centralized 911 call is originated the Electra Elite IPK searches for an idle line in the TG that has lower priority in the route advance block assigned in Memory Block 1 8 43 and then searches for an idle line in the trunk group route advance block assigned in Memory Block 1 8 44 When a Centralized E911call...

Page 455: ...__________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ Document Revision 4 Electra Elite IPK THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 456: ...ry Block 1 16 02 Port Duplex Mode Selection are used When equipment with auto negotiation function is connected to a port ensure that the YS is set for this Memory Block R1500 or higher is required Display Settings LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default YS NO Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK16 to access the Memory Block 3 Press the correspond...

Page 457: ...n 1 16 04 VLAN Mode Selection 1 16 05 Default VLAN ID Tag Insertion Assignment 1 16 06 Port Based Priority Selection 1 16 07 High Priority RX Tag Threshold 1 16 08 High Priority TX Tag Assignment 1 16 09 Low Priority TX Tag Assignment 1 16 10 Port Mirroring Selection 1 16 11 Mirroring Source Port Assignment 1 16 12 Mirroring Target Port Assignment 1 16 13 VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment 1 16 14 P...

Page 458: ... Ethernet port speed as 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps for each port of each HUB 8 U ETU R1500 or higher is required Display Settings LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default 10 100 Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK16 JJKAto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the Setting Data option 4 Press G to write the data 5 Rep...

Page 459: ... Insertion Assignment 1 16 06 Port Based Priority Selection 1 16 07 High Priority RX Tag Threshold 1 16 08 High Priority TX Tag Assignment 1 16 09 Low Priority TX Tag Assignment 1 16 10 Port Mirroring Selection 1 16 11 Mirroring Source Port Assignment 1 16 12 Mirroring Target Port Assignment 1 16 13 VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment 1 16 14 Port VLAN Group Membership 1 16 15 VLAN Tag Insertion Sele...

Page 460: ...mode HALF or FULL for each port of each HUB 8 U ETU R1500 or higher is required Display Settings LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default HALF FULL Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK16 JJKBto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the Setting Data option 4 Press G to write the data 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for e...

Page 461: ... Tag Insertion Assignment 1 16 06 Port Based Priority Selection 1 16 07 High Priority RX Tag Threshold 1 16 08 High Priority TX Tag Assignment 1 16 09 Low Priority TX Tag Assignment 1 16 10 Port Mirroring Selection 1 16 11 Mirroring Source Port Assignment 1 16 12 Mirroring Target Port Assignment 1 16 13 VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment 1 16 14 Port VLAN Group Membership 1 16 15 VLAN Tag Insertion ...

Page 462: ...8 U ETU R1500 or higher is required Display Settings LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default MDIX MDI Auto Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK16 JJKCto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the Setting Data option 4 Press G to write the data 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each Port of each HUB 8 U ETU 6 Press E t...

Page 463: ... Assignment 1 16 10 Port Mirroring Selection 1 16 11 Mirroring Source Port Assignment 1 16 12 Mirroring Target Port Assignment 1 16 13 VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment 1 16 14 Port VLAN Group Membership 1 16 15 VLAN Tag Insertion Selection 1 16 16 Flow Control for Full Duplex Selection 1 16 17 Back Pressure for Half Duplex Selection 1 Only one HUB 8 U ETU can be assigned and installed for each cab...

Page 464: ...Port Based Priority Selection Memory Block 1 16 07 High Priority RX Tag Threshold Memory Block 1 16 08 High Priority TX Tag Assignment and Memory Block 1 16 09 Low Priority TX Tag Assignment R1500 or higher is required Display Settings LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default NO YS Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK16 JJKDto access the Memory Blo...

Page 465: ...ck Pressure for Half Duplex Selection 1 Only one HUB 8 U ETU can be assigned and installed for each cabinet 2 A virtual logical LAN is a local area network with a definition that maps workstations on a basis other than geographic location for example department user type or primary application The virtual LAN controller can change or add workstations and manage load balancing and bandwidth allocat...

Page 466: ...device on the port a tag is inserted with the VLAN ID assigned by this Memory Block R1500 or higher is required Display Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK16 JJKEto access the Memory Block 3 Use dial pad keys to enter Setting data Use the following to enter data Use Jto move cursor left Use Lto move cursor right Use K Ito enter numeric data VLAN ID range is 0001 4095 0x001 0xfff He...

Page 467: ...ority TX Tag Assignment 1 16 09 Low Priority TX Tag Assignment 1 16 10 Port Mirroring Selection 1 16 11 Mirroring Source Port Assignment 1 16 12 Mirroring Target Port Assignment 1 16 13 VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment 1 16 14 Port VLAN Group Membership 1 16 15 VLAN Tag Insertion Selection 1 16 16 Flow Control for Full Duplex Selection 1 16 17 Back Pressure for Half Duplex Selection 1 Only one HUB...

Page 468: ...ames for the egress port are used to convert the low or high priority queue to a VLAN tag priority 0 7 Set to NO default this Memory block does not mark frames for either queue Memory Block 1 16 07 then determines the priority queue for where the frame is sent R1500 or higher is required Display Settings LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default NO Not Assigned LO...

Page 469: ...rol for Full Duplex Selection 1 16 17 Back Pressure for Half Duplex Selection 1 Only one HUB 8 U ETU can be assigned and installed for each cabinet 2 In networks QoS indicates that transmission rates error rates and other characteristics can be measured improved and to some extent guaranteed in advance QoS is particularly important for continuous transmission of high bandwidth video multimedia and...

Page 470: ...it is queued for low priority When it is transmitted out the egress port of the HUB 8 it retains its original VLAN tag priority value R1500 or higher is required Display Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK16 JJKGto access the Memory Block 3 Use dial pad keys to enter Setting data Use the following to enter data Use Jto move cursor left Use Lto move cursor right Use K Ito enter nume...

Page 471: ...ion 1 16 08 High Priority TX Tag Assignment 1 16 09 Low Priority TX Tag Assignment 1 16 10 Port Mirroring Selection 1 16 11 Mirroring Source Port Assignment 1 16 12 Mirroring Target Port Assignment 1 16 13 VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment 1 16 14 Port VLAN Group Membership 1 16 15 VLAN Tag Insertion Selection 1 16 16 Flow Control for Full Duplex Selection 1 16 17 Back Pressure for Half Duplex Sele...

Page 472: ...0 7 to the priority field of the VLAN tag The default is 7 R1500 or higher is required Display Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK16 JJKHto access the Memory Block 3 Use dial pad keys to enter Setting data Use the following to enter data Use Jto move cursor left Use Lto move cursor right Use K Ito enter numeric data Priority range is lowest 0 7 highest Default Values All ports 7 4 ...

Page 473: ... 07 High Priority RX Tag Threshold 1 16 09 Low Priority TX Tag Assignment 1 16 10 Port Mirroring Selection 1 16 11 Mirroring Source Port Assignment 1 16 12 Mirroring Target Port Assignment 1 16 13 VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment 1 16 14 Port VLAN Group Membership 1 16 15 VLAN Tag Insertion Selection 1 16 16 Flow Control for Full Duplex Selection 1 16 17 Back Pressure for Half Duplex Selection 1 O...

Page 474: ...f the VLAN tag The default is 0 R1500 or higher is required Display Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK16 JJKIto access the Memory Block 3 Use dial pad keys to enter Setting data Use the following to enter data Use Jto move cursor left Use Lto move cursor right Use K Ito enter numeric data Priority range is lowest 0 7 highest Default Values All ports 0 4 Press G to write the data 5...

Page 475: ...7 High Priority RX Tag Threshold 1 16 08 High Priority TX Tag Assignment 1 16 10 Port Mirroring Selection 1 16 11 Mirroring Source Port Assignment 1 16 12 Mirroring Target Port Assignment 1 16 13 VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment 1 16 14 Port VLAN Group Membership 1 16 15 VLAN Tag Insertion Selection 1 16 16 Flow Control for Full Duplex Selection 1 16 17 Back Pressure for Half Duplex Selection 1 On...

Page 476: ...urce port and the target port must be members of the same VLAN s R1500 or higher is required Display Settings LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default NO Normal YS Mirror Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK16 JJAKto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the option 4 Press G to write the data 5 Repeat steps 3 a...

Page 477: ...09 Low Priority TX Tag Assignment 1 16 11 Mirroring Source Port Assignment 1 16 12 Mirroring Target Port Assignment 1 16 13 VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment 1 16 14 Port VLAN Group Membership 1 16 15 VLAN Tag Insertion Selection 1 16 16 Flow Control for Full Duplex Selection 1 16 17 Back Pressure for Half Duplex Selection 1 Only one HUB 8 U ETU can be assigned and installed for each cabinet 2 The ...

Page 478: ...y Block 1 16 12 Mirroring Target Port Assigment for each HUB 8 U ETU The source port and target port must be in the same VLAN s R1500 or higher is required Display Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK16 JJAAto access the Memory Block 3 Use dial pad keys to enter Setting Data Use the following to enter data Use Jto move cursor left Use Lto move cursor right Use K Ito enter numeric da...

Page 479: ...1 16 07 High Priority RX Tag Threshold 1 16 08 High Priority TX Tag Assignment 1 16 09 Low Priority TX Tag Assignment 1 16 10 Port Mirroring Selection 1 16 12 Mirroring Target Port Assignment 1 16 13 VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment 1 16 14 Port VLAN Group Membership 1 16 15 VLAN Tag Insertion Selection 1 16 16 Flow Control for Full Duplex Selection 1 16 17 Back Pressure for Half Duplex Selection ...

Page 480: ...by Memory Block 1 16 11 Mirroring Source Port Assigment for each HUB 8 U ETU The source port and target port must be in the same VLAN s R1500 or higher is required Display Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK16 JJABto access the Memory Block 3 Use dial pad keys to enter Setting data Use the following to enter data Use Jto move cursor left Use Lto move cursor right Use K Ito enter nu...

Page 481: ...ag Assignment 1 16 09 Low Priority TX Tag Assignment 1 16 10 Port Mirroring Selection 1 16 11 Mirroring Source Port Assignment 1 16 13 VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment 1 16 14 Port VLAN Group Membership 1 16 15 VLAN Tag Insertion Selection 1 16 16 Flow Control for Full Duplex Selection 1 16 17 Back Pressure for Half Duplex Selection 1 Only one HUB 8 U ETU can be assigned and installed for each cab...

Page 482: ...0 or higher is required Display Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK16 JJACto access the Memory Block 3 Use dial pad keys to enter Setting data Use the following to enter data Use Jto move cursor left Use Lto move cursor right Use K Ito enter numeric data ID range is 0001 4095 0x001 0xfff Hex Default Values 0000 4 Press G to write the data 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each HUB 8 U ETU...

Page 483: ... Selection 1 16 03 MDI MDIX Mode Selection 1 16 04 VLAN Mode Selection 1 16 05 Default VLAN ID Tag Insertion Assignment 1 16 06 Port Based Priority Selection 1 16 07 High Priority RX Tag Threshold 1 16 08 High Priority TX Tag Assignment 1 16 09 Low Priority TX Tag Assignment 1 16 10 Port Mirroring Selection 1 16 11 Mirroring Source Port Assignment 1 16 12 Mirroring Target Port Assignment 1 16 14 P...

Page 484: ...er of that VLAN Group Frames without VLAN tags are also permitted When Port Mirroring is used the source and target ports must be members of the same VLAN s R1500 or higher is required Display Settings LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default NO YS Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK16 JJADto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PB...

Page 485: ... 16 04 VLAN Mode Selection 1 16 05 Default VLAN ID Tag Insertion Assignment 1 16 06 Port Based Priority Selection 1 16 07 High Priority RX Tag Threshold 1 16 08 High Priority TX Tag Assignment 1 16 09 Low Priority TX Tag Assignment 1 16 10 Port Mirroring Selection 1 16 11 Mirroring Source Port Assignment 1 16 12 Mirroring Target Port Assignment 1 16 13 VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment 1 16 15 VLAN...

Page 486: ...et to NO tags are deleted from frames of the same VLAN Group transmitted on this port R1500 or higher is required Display Settings LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default NO YS Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK16 JJAEto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the option 4 Press G to write the data 5 Repeat st...

Page 487: ...on 1 16 05 Default VLAN ID Tag Insertion Assignment 1 16 06 Port Based Priority Selection 1 16 07 High Priority RX Tag Threshold 1 16 08 High Priority TX Tag Assignment 1 16 09 Low Priority TX Tag Assignment 1 16 10 Port Mirroring Selection 1 16 11 Mirroring Source Port Assignment 1 16 12 Mirroring Target Port Assignment 1 16 13 VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment 1 16 14 Port VLAN Group Membership 1...

Page 488: ...w Control is enabled for each HUB 8 U ETU port R1500 or higher is required Display Settings LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default NO YS Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK16 JJAFto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the option 4 Press G to write the data 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each HUB 8 U ETU port 6...

Page 489: ...ode Selection 1 16 03 MDI MDIX Mode Selection 1 16 04 VLAN Mode Selection 1 16 05 Default VLAN ID Tag Insertion Assignment 1 16 06 Port Based Priority Selection 1 16 07 High Priority RX Tag Threshold 1 16 08 High Priority TX Tag Assignment 1 16 09 Low Priority TX Tag Assignment 1 16 10 Port Mirroring Selection 1 16 11 Mirroring Source Port Assignment 1 16 12 Mirroring Target Port Assignment 1 16 1...

Page 490: ...w Control is enabled for each HUB 8 U ETU port R1500 or higher is required Display Settings LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default NO YS Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK1 LK16 JJAGto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the option 4 Press G to write the data 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each HUB 8 U ETU port 6...

Page 491: ...Mode Selection 1 16 03 MDI MDIX Mode Selection 1 16 04 VLAN Mode Selection 1 16 05 Default VLAN ID Tag Insertion Assignment 1 16 06 Port Based Priority Selection 1 16 07 High Priority RX Tag Threshold 1 16 08 High Priority TX Tag Assignment 1 16 09 Low Priority TX Tag Assignment 1 16 10 Port Mirroring Selection 1 16 11 Mirroring Source Port Assignment 1 16 12 Mirroring Target Port Assignment 1 16 ...

Page 492: ...4 05 06 07 08 Page 2 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Page 3 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Page 4 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Page 5 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 Page 6 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 4 Page 7 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 ...

Page 493: ...next assigned Tenant No C to go to the next page A to go to the previous page Data Options Default Values Tenant 00 All trunks are assigned Tenant 01 47 Not assigned 4 Press G to write the data The next Memory Block is displayed 5 Program Memory Blocks 2 05 2 09 The next Tenant No is displayed 6 Repeat steps 3 4 and 5 for each Tenant No Memory Block 2 01 Tenant 00 is displayed 7 Press E to go back...

Page 494: ...rite the data The next Memory Block is displayed 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 2 06 Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode 4 12 Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode 1 Mixed use of Tenant Wide Mode and Telephone Mode is permitted in the system 2 Tenant Wide Mode Memory Block 2 06 Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode permits...

Page 495: ...y TKGP Route Advance Page 2 LK 9 LK102 LK 11 LK 12 LK 13 LK 14 LK 15 LK 16 SIE Microphone H SET SCROLL ANI Caller ID DND On Off LOG On Off BGM On Off ICM Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK2 KFto access the Memory Block Verify that Memory Block 2 05 is set to TNAT 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to select the function for Line Key No 01 When indicated add Setting Data 2 using...

Page 496: ...t 00 CO PBX Lines 01 08 Tenant 01 47 Not Assigned Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 2 05 Line Key Selection Programming Procedures Setting Data Page 1 Line Key Setting Data 1 LCD Indication Setting Data 2 1 Not Specified NON N A 2 CO CO 01 64 3 CFW BNA FW BNA N A 4 CFW ALL FW ALL N A 5 Call Appearance Block 00 47 C Call Appearance Key 01 24 6 Feature Access F A 01 16 7 Trunk Group T...

Page 497: ...is Memory Block to assign the following functions to each of the CO PBX line keys on each telephone in a tenant specified as Tenant Mode in Memory Block 2 05 Line Key Selection H Not specified NON H CO PBX Line CO 01 64 H CFW BNA H CFW ALL H Call Appearance C 00 47 01 24 Each Call Appearance Block may have a maximum of 24 Call Appearance keys H Feature Access FA 01 16 H Trunk Group TKGP 01 32 H Ro...

Page 498: ...Settings Page 1 When system Speed Dial is 80 buffers LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 All line keys are at the default setting 00 09 10 19 20 29 30 39 40 49 50 59 60 69 70 79 Page 2 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 Page 1 When system Speed Dial is 1000 buffers LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 499 000 099 100 199 200 299 300 399 400 499 500 599 600 699 700 799 Page 2 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 ...

Page 499: ...fault Values All Speed Dial confirmation allowed 4 After entering data for both pages press G to write the data The next Memory Block is displayed 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 1 35 Speed Dial Buffer Allocation 1 8 07 Class of Service Attendant Feature Selection 1 1 When Deny is specified no display is presented eve...

Page 500: ...he data option Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right D to go to the next assigned Tenant No Default Values All Tenants No Assignment 4 Press the G to write the data The next Memory Block is displayed 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 7 07 External Ring Relay Pattern Selection...

Page 501: ...k 3 Enter Setting Data using the dial pad Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data Default Values 00 No Limit 01 64 Incoming Calls 4 Press G to write the data The next Tenant No for Memory Block 2 01 is displayed 5 Program all Tenants After Tenant 47 is programmed the display cycles back to Tenant 01 of Memory Block 2 01 6 Press E ...

Page 502: ...ock 3 Leave Number set or press LK2 to change to name for the data option for the selected CO PBX No 01 and enter the number or name refer to Notes Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or CO PBX No OR D to go to the next assigned CO PBX No B to generate a hyphen H to generate a space clear after hold Default Values Not Specifie...

Page 503: ...7 LK8 The shaded selection is the default OUT IN IN Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK3 G to access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX Line Key to change the option Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or CO PBX No OR D to go to the next assigned CO PBX No 4 Press G to write the data and display the ...

Page 504: ...s CO PBX lines 01 08 in Trunk Group 01 CO PBX lines 09 64 in Trunk Group 00 All Tie lines in Trunk Group 02 All DID lines Trunk Group 00 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line 1 When a Trunk group Access Code is dialed an idle CO line is selected automatically and seized from the same Trunk group dialed the CO lin...

Page 505: ...LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default NO YES Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK3 G KDto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX Line Key to change the option Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or CO PBX No OR D to go to the next assigned CO PBX No 4 Press G to write the data and display t...

Page 506: ..._______________ Notes Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 8 07 Class of Service Attendant Feature Selection 1 1 8 08 Class of Service Station Feature Selection 2 3 05 Trunk Incoming Answer Mode Selection 3 06 Automatic Tandem Trunk Assignment 5 01 Tie Line Networking Tandem Connection Assignment Assign YS to connect both trunks via Trunk to Trunk Transfer or Automatic Trunk to Trunk...

Page 507: ...mming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK3 G KEto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option for CO PBX No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or CO PBX No OR D to go to the next assigned CO PBX No Setting Data 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Prog...

Page 508: ...nk to Trunk Transfer Mode when an attendant position enters 00 during the set or cancel operation For example To set Automatic Trunk to Trunk Transfer Mode from an attendant position Press A FA KK A To cancel Automatic Trunk to Trunk Transfer Mode from an attendant position Press A FB KK A 2 Only trunks assigned to AA in this Memory Block are set or canceled for Automated Attendant DISA Mode when ...

Page 509: ...k 3 Enter the outgoing trunk number for incoming CO PBX No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or CO PBX No OR D to go to the next assigned CO PBX No Default Values Not Specified 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B N...

Page 510: ...ne key to change the ringing tone for CO PBX Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or CO PBX No OR D to go to the next assigned CO PBX No 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 1 28 Distinctive ...

Page 511: ... Go off line 2 Press LK3 G AAto access the Memory Block 3 Press LK2 to change Music On Hold to an external source for CO PBX No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or CO PBX No OR D to go to the next assigned CO PBX No 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to g...

Page 512: ... OR D to go to the next assigned CO PBX No Default Values 00 Not Assigned for CO PBX No 01 64 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 4 17 Automated Attendant Delay Announcement Hold Tone Selection 1 8 09 Music on Hold Pattern Selection 1 8 31 Hold Tone Source Assi...

Page 513: ...DIATE DELAY WINK Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK3 G ADto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the loop supervision for CO PBX No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or CO PBX No OR D to go to the next assigned CO PBX No 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memo...

Page 514: ...___________________________________ Notes 1 Line keys 1 4 identify the following methods of loop supervision 1 Second Dial Tone 2 Immediate Start 3 Delay Dial 4 Wink Start 2 This Memory Block affects T1 channels assigned as Tie lines 3 When a second dial tone is selected the distant system provides the dial tone 4 When Immediate Delay or Wink is selected the local system provides the dial tone ...

Page 515: ... 80 160 80 210 80 410 100 610 100 810 190 Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK3 G AEto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change tone duration interdigit time for CO PBX No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or CO PBX No OR D to go to the next assigned CO PBX No 4 Press G to write ...

Page 516: ...___________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ Notes 1 This is also used for Tie lines 2 This Memory Block affects T1 Channels assigned as Tie DID lines A DTI U ETU is required ...

Page 517: ...LK 7 LK 8 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 0 10 0 11 0 12 0 13 0 Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK3 G AFto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change prepause time for CO PBX No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or CO PBX No OR D to go to the next assigned CO PBX No C to go to the next page A to g...

Page 518: ...1170 1300 1430 1560 1690 1820 1950 Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK3 G AGto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change answer detect time for CO PBX No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or CO PBX No OR D to go to the next assigned CO PBX No C to go to the next page A to go to t...

Page 519: ...s 0 130 260 390 520 650 780 910 Page 2 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 1040 1170 1300 1430 1560 1690 1820 1950 Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK3 G AHto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change release detect time for CO PBX No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or CO P...

Page 520: ...on include H Called side hangs up first The circuit is released 92 ms specified time after the other party disconnects the call H Called side hangs up second The circuit is released when the specified time has elapsed after the other party hangs up H Originating side hangs up first The circuit is released 92 ms specified time after the other party hangs up H Originating side hangs up second The ci...

Page 521: ... LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 08 1040 ms 09 1170 ms 10 1300 ms 11 1430 ms 12 1560 ms 13 1690 ms 14 1820 ms 15 1950 ms Page 1 Delay LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 00 0 ms 01 30 ms 02 60 ms 03 90 ms 04 120 ms 05 150 ms 06 180 ms 07 210 ms Page 2 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 08 240 ms 09 270 ms 10 300 ms 11 330 ms 12 360 ms 13 390 ms 14 420 ms 15 450 ms Page 1 COI LK 1 LK 2 ...

Page 522: ...ight K Ito enter numeric data or CO PBX No OR D to go to the next assigned CO PBX No C to go to the next page A to go to the previous page 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 3 14 Tie DID Line Type Assignment 1 For second dial tone and immediate loop supervision ...

Page 523: ...0 1 5 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 Page 2 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 0 10 0 11 0 12 0 13 0 Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK3 G BKto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change loop off guard time for CO PBX No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or CO PBX No OR D to ...

Page 524: ...________________________________________________________ Notes 1 Assign a loop off guard time to prevent system malfunction caused by noise when going off hook to answer a call from another system on a Tie line call 2 The system ignores any noise that is detected during the time specified in this Memory Block 3 This Memory Block affects T1 channels assigned as Tie DID lines ...

Page 525: ...K 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 270 300 330 360 390 420 450 480 Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK3 G BAto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change wink signal time for CO PBX No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or CO PBX No OR D to go to the next assigned CO PBX No C to go ...

Page 526: ..._______________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ Notes 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line 1 Specify Wink Start in Memory Block 3 14 Tie Line Type Assignment 2 This Memory Block affects T1 channels assigned as Tie DID lines Programming Procedures Continued ...

Page 527: ... 2400 2700 3000 3300 3600 3900 4200 4500 Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK3 G BBto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change delay signal time for CO PBX No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or CO PBX No OR D to go to the next assigned CO PBX No C to go to the next page A to go...

Page 528: ...________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ Notes 1 Specify Delay loop supervision in Memory Block 3 14 Tie Line Type Assignment 2 This Memory Block affects T1 channels assigned as Tie DID lines ...

Page 529: ...ault No Limit 1s 2s 3s 4s 5s 6s 7s Page 2 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 8s 9s 10s 11s 12s 13s 14s 15s Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK3 G BDto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change incoming interdigit timeout for CO PBX No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or CO ...

Page 530: ...__________________________________ Notes 1 A timeout occurs when A dial pulse is not received within the time specified by this Memory Block after the receiving side detects the off hook signal The next dial pulse is not received within the time specified by this Memory Block after the receiving side detects receives a dial pulse 2 This Memory Block affects T1 channels assigned to Tie DID lines ...

Page 531: ...m time in seconds for receiving an acknowledgment signal from a distant system before sending a busy tone Display Settings Page 1 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default No Limit 1s 2s 3s 4s 5s 6s 7s Page 2 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 8s 9s 10s 11s 12s 13s 14s 15s Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK3 G BEto access the Memory Block CO PBX ...

Page 532: ...ata or CO PBX No OR D to go to the next assigned CO PBX No C to go to the next page A to go to the previous page 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line 1 When the acknowledgment signal is not received in a programmed time after an outgoing signal is sent to the other system a busy tone is sent to the telephone 2 T...

Page 533: ...rogramming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK3 G BGto access the Memory Block 3 Press Lk1 when you don t want to send a dial tone to the distant system for CO PBX No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or CO PBX No OR D to go to the next assigned CO PBX No 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Progra...

Page 534: ... 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default NO YS Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK3 G BHto access the Memory Block 3 Press LK1 to cancel a reorder tone to the originating system for CO PBX No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or CO PBX No OR D to go to the next assigned CO PBX No 4 Press G to write the data an...

Page 535: ...___________________ Document Revision 4 Electra Elite IPK ___________________________________________________________________________________ Notes Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 3 14 Tie Line Type Assignment This Memory Block affects T1 channels assigned as Tie lines ...

Page 536: ...are in dB 2 4 6 8 12 16 3 3 Page 2 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 0 Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK3 G BIto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change internal transmit pad for CO PBX No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or CO PBX No OR D to go to the next assigned CO...

Page 537: ...e following patterns 2 The Memory Block applies to Tie lines T1 DID and Basic Rate Interface BRI trunks Specify the sending and receiving levels of each pattern for each of the trunks Pattern A Intercom Mode Sending level Receiving level Pattern B Tandem Mode Sending level Receiving level Connections established between the intercom stations of the local system and trunks To be specified in this M...

Page 538: ...in dB 2 4 6 8 12 16 3 3 Page 2 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 0 Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK3 G CKto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change internal receive pad for CO PBX No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or CO PBX No OR D to go to the next assigned CO PBX ...

Page 539: ... following patterns 2 This Memory Block applies to Tie lines T1 DID and Basic Rate Interface BRI trunks Specify the sending and receiving levels of each pattern for each of the trunks Pattern A Intercom Mode Sending level Receiving level Pattern B Tandem Mode Sending level Receiving level Connections established between the intercom stations of the local system and trunks To be specified in this M...

Page 540: ...in dB 2 4 6 8 12 16 3 3 Page 2 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 0 Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK3 G CAto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change external transmit pad for CO PBX No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or CO PBX No OR D to go to the next assigned CO PBX...

Page 541: ...s into the following patterns 2 This Memory Block applies to Tie lines T1 DID and ISDN trunks Specify the sending and receiving levels of each pattern for each of the trunks Pattern A Intercom Mode Sending level Receiving level Pattern B Tandem Mode Sending level Receiving level Connections established between the intercom stations of the local system and trunks Connections established between two...

Page 542: ...in dB 2 4 6 8 12 16 3 3 Page 2 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 0 Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK3 G CBto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change eternal receive pad for CO PBX No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or CO PBX No OR D to go to the next assigned CO PBX N...

Page 543: ...ides the connections into the following patterns 2 This Memory Block applies to Tie lines T1 DID and ISDN trunks Specify the sending and receiving levels of each pattern for each of the trunks Pattern A Intercom Mode Sending level Receiving level Pattern B Tandem Mode Sending level Receiving level Connections established between the intercom stations of the local system and trunks Connections esta...

Page 544: ...Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK3 G CCto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change disconnect recognition time for CO PBX No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or CO PBX No OR D to go to the next assigned CO PBX No C to go to the next page A to go to the previous page 4 Press G to write th...

Page 545: ...es Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK3 G CHto access the Memory Block 3 Enter data for CO PBX No using the dial pad to change the Automated Attendant message number Setting Data 1 8 Automated Attendant Message 1 8 Use the following to enter data Jto moves the cursor left Lto moves the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or CO PBX No OR D to go to the next assigned CO PBX Line No Def...

Page 546: ...iseconds 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 Page 2 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 NO limit Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK3 G DKto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change signal release time for CO PBX No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or C...

Page 547: ...cifications Manual LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default NN NO YN Day NY Night YY Both Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK3 G DAto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to assign the delay announcement for CO PBX No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric dat...

Page 548: ...ent when assigned R2500 is required Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK3 G DBto access the Memory Block 3 Enter data for CO PBX No using the dial pad to assign DIT to a station Use the following to enter data Jto moves the cursor left Lto moves the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or CO PBX No OR D to go to the next assigned CO PBX Line No Enter the following Station No 2 3 or 4 d...

Page 549: ...Assignment 1 1 48 Access Code 3 Digit Assignment 1 2 03 2 7 Digit Station Number Selection 1 2 34 Expanded Station Number Assignment 3 43 ANA Assignment 4 10 Station Number Assignment 1 A trunk can terminate at only one station but any number of trunks can terminate at the same station 2 When 5 6 or 7 digit Extension Numbers are used the leading digits are assigned in Memory Block 1 2 34 Expanded ...

Page 550: ...Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK3 G DCto access the Memory Block 3 Enter data for CO PBX No using the dial pad to assign ANA to a station Use the following to enter data Jto moves the cursor left Lto moves the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or CO PBX No OR D to go to the next assigned CO PBX Line No Enter the following Station No 2 3 or 4 digits 10 8999 CO Port No 01 64 Defau...

Page 551: ...cess Code 3 Digit Assignment 1 2 03 2 7 Digit Station Number Selection 1 2 34 Expanded Station Number Assignment 3 42 DIT Assignment 4 10 Station Number Assignment 1 A trunk can terminate at only one station but any number of trunks can terminate at the same station 2 When 5 6 or 7 digit Extension Numbers are used the leading digits are assigned in Memory Block 1 2 34 Expanded Station Number Assig...

Page 552: ...ndividual features in the Electra Elite IPK Features and Specifications Manual Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK3 G DDto access the Memory Block 3 Enter data for CO PBX No using the dial pad to assign ANI Caller ID to a station Use the following to enter data Jto moves the cursor left Lto moves the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or CO PBX No OR D to go to the next assigned CO ...

Page 553: ...or normal incoming CO calls and CAR incoming calls both Caller ID Indication and Ring assignment must be Programmed A maximum of 15 Multiline Terminals can be assigned system wide to display ANI Caller ID for normal incoming CO calls and CAR incoming calls using Memory Block 1 1 78 Caller ID Display Assignment for System Mode Another Multiline Terminal can be assigned to display ANI Caller ID Indi...

Page 554: ...YS Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK3 G DEto access the Memory Block 3 Press LK2 to assign Live Record for CO PBX No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or CO PBX No OR D to go to the next assigned CO PBX No Default Values NO 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory ...

Page 555: ...play Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK3 G EKto access the Memory Block 3 Enter data for CO PBX No using the dial pad to assign ISDN SPID to a station Use the following to enter data Jto moves the cursor left Lto moves the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or CO PBX No OR D to go to the next assigned CO PBX Line No 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Pr...

Page 556: ...ay Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK3 G EBto access the Memory Block 3 Enter data for CO PBX No using the dial pad to assign ISDN Directory Number Use the following to enter data Jto moves the cursor left Lto moves the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or CO PBX No OR D to go to the next assigned CO PBX Line No 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Progr...

Page 557: ...esponding CO PBX line key to change the data option Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or CO PBX No OR D to go to the next assigned CO PBX No Settings include NO Disables caller name display NUM Selected when system speed dial buffers are assigned a number the number is displayed when Caller ID number matches a speed dial num...

Page 558: ...K3 G EIto access the Memory Block 3 Press LK2 to Delay Announcement Mode on CO PBX No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or CO PBX No OR D to go to the next assigned CO PBX No 4 Press G to write the selected data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programmin...

Page 559: ... Procedures LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default 0s 5s 10s 20s 30s 40s 50s 60s Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK3 G FAto access the Memory Block 3 Press the applicable line key to change the time an incoming call rings before it is changed to a DIT ANA call on CO PBX NO Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor...

Page 560: ...0s 00s No Time 4 Press G to write the data and display the next memory block 5 Program the next memory block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 3 42 DIT Assignment 3 43 ANA Assignment 3 62 DIT Tenant Assignment 1 When the time is set to a value other than 0 call termination is treated as a normal incoming call and DIT termination is performed after the t...

Page 561: ...2 Press LK3 G FBto access the Memory Block 3 Select the CO PBX Line No and enter the Tenant No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter Tenant No or CO PBX No OR D to go to the next assigned CO PBX Line No Default Values Tenant 00 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back...

Page 562: ...d selection is the default YS NO Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK3 G FCto access the Memory Block 3 Press LK2 to disable weekend Mode check on Tenant Groups for incoming DIT calls on CO PBX No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or CO PBX No OR D to go to the next assigned CO PBX No 4 Press G to write the select...

Page 563: ...LK 8 The shaded selection is the default NO YS Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK3 G FDto access the Memory Block 3 Press LK2 to apply DIT Delay Answer time for incoming DIT calls ringing in night mode on CO PBX No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or CO PBX No OR D to go to the next assigned CO PBX No 4 Press G...

Page 564: ...MSG 7 Page 2 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 MSG 8 Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK3 G FEto access the Memory Block 3 Press line key to specify the Automated Attendant message to play to an extension or DID trunk on an incoming call to CO PBX No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or CO PBX No OR D to go...

Page 565: ...____ Document Revision 4 Electra Elite IPK ___________________________________________________________________________________ Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 4 11 Automated Attendant Message Day Night Mode Selection 1 4 17 Automated Attendant Delay Announcement Hold Tone Selection ...

Page 566: ...ge 2 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 Ringing Pattern H Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK3 G FGto access the Memory Block 3 Press line key to specify the Ringing pattern assigned to CO PBX No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or CO PBX No OR D to go to the next assigned CO PBX No C to go to the next page...

Page 567: ...___________________________________ Document Revision 4 Electra Elite IPK ___________________________________________________________________________________ The Ring Patterns are shown in the table below s seconds Pattern A B C D E F G H NO No Ring 0s 1s 2s 3s 4s 5s 6s ...

Page 568: ...ction is the default NO YES Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK3 G FIto access the Memory Block Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or CO PBX No OR D to go to the next assigned CO PBX No Default Values CO PBX No 01 64 NO 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the Setting Data option 4 Press G to write ...

Page 569: ...lock Name 3 03 Trunk to Trunk Group Assignment 3 33 Disconnect Recognition Time Selection 3 91 Trunk Type Selection 1 1 24 PBX CTX Access Code Assignment I 1 1 25 PBX CTX Access Code Assignment II 1 When only one trunk is assigned YES this is the only trunk used for 911 Cut Through 2 The following calls are not used for 911 Cut Through Receiving Normal Incoming Call Receiving DIT ANA Call Incoming...

Page 570: ...ming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK3 G GKto access the Memory Block Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or CO PBX No OR D to go to the next assigned CO PBX No Default Values 000 Not Specified CIC Number range 001 127 3 Press G to write the selected data and display next Memory Block or Memory Block 3 00 CO PBX 02 After th...

Page 571: ...n 1 15 01 Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignment 1 15 02 Common Signal Channel Assignment 1 15 03 Originating Point Code Assignment 1 15 04 Destination Point Code Assignment 1 15 05 Destination Point Code Transfer Assignment 1 15 06 Originating Office Code Number Assignment 1 15 07 K CCIS Message Response Timeout Assignment 1 15 08 Link Reconnect Allow Deny Selection 1 15 09 K CCIS Maximum Ca...

Page 572: ...e 2 Press LK3 G GCto access the Memory Block Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or CO PBX No OR D to go to the next assigned CO PBX No Default Values CO PBX No 01 64 NO 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the Setting Data option 4 Press G to write the selected data and display Memory Block 3 00 CO PBX 02 After...

Page 573: ...ge and the SPID setup When this Memory Block is set to NO DID calls can be received on BRI trunks and directed according to Memory Block 1 1 22 DID Digit Conversion Table Display Settings LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default NO YES Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK3 G GGto access the Memory Block Use the following to enter data Jto move the curs...

Page 574: ...ion Assignment 1 1 22 DID Digit Conversion Table 1 1 23 DID Forward Station Number for Busy Station or Undefined Digit 1 R4000 or higher is required to support this Memory Block 2 When YES is selected the BRT PRT allows only a Directory Number as assigned in Memory Block 3 52 ISDN Trunk Directory Number Assignment 3 When NO is selected the BRT PRT always passes the Directory Number to the CPU 4 Th...

Page 575: ...he shaded selection is the default NO YS Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK3 G IKto access the Memory Block 3 Press LK2 to reverse polarity for an answer supervision signal on CO PBX No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or CO PBX No OR D to go to the next assigned CO PBX No 4 Press G to write the selected data a...

Page 576: ...Go off line 2 Press LK3 G IAto access the Memory Block 3 Press line key to specify trunk type for CO PBX No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or CO PBX No OR D to go to the next assigned CO PBX No 4 Press G to write the selected data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on l...

Page 577: ...ss line key to specify external line as DP or DTMF for CO PBX No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or CO PBX No OR D to go to the next assigned CO PBX No 4 Press G to write the selected data and display the next CO PBX No for Memory Block 3 90 After CO PBX No 64 is entered CO PBX No 01 is again displayed on Memory Block 3 90...

Page 578: ... B9 110 119 B 2 for B C0 120 B 3 for C LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 Page 2 Trunks 09 16 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Page 3 Trunks17 24 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Page 4 Trunks 25 32 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Page 5 Tru...

Page 579: ... line key is pressed Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No OR D to go to next assigned Tel Port No C to go to the next page A to go to the previous page Default Values CO PBX lines 01 08 ring at Tel Port numbers 01 and 02 Tel Port numbers 03 120 do not ring on any incoming CO PBX calls 4 Press G to write the data ...

Page 580: ...ation A0 A9 100 109 B 1 for A B0 B9 110 119 B 2 for B C0 120 B 3 for C LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 Page 2 Trunks 09 16 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Page 3 Trunks 17 24 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Page 4 Trunks 25 32 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 2...

Page 581: ...O PBX Line key to select night ring assignment for Tel Port No The LED indication changes to indicate data each time a CO PBX line key is pressed Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No OR D to go to next assigned Tel Port No C to go to the next page A to go to the previous page Default Values CO PBX lines 01 08 rin...

Page 582: ...Go off line 2 Press LK4 KCto access the Memory Block 3 Use LK1 LK4 to assign doorphones 1 4 to chime for Day Mode on Tel Port No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No OR D to go to next assigned Tel Port No B Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100 109 B Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110 119 B Cto enter C for Port Number ...

Page 583: ... IPK ___________________________________________________________________________________ Notes Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 7 00 Doorphone Assignment 1 7 01 Doorphone Display Time Selection 1 7 04 Doorphone Ringing Pattern Selection 1 7 05 Doorphone Ringing Frequency Selection Telephone ports A0 C0 are ports 100 120 ...

Page 584: ...dures 1 Go off line 2 Press KDto access the Memory Block 3 Use LK1 LK4 to assign doorphones 1 4 to chime for Night Mode on Tel Port No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lo move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No OR D to go to next assigned Tel Port No B Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100 109 B Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110 119 B Cto enter C for Port Nu...

Page 585: ...a Elite IPK ___________________________________________________________________________________ Notes Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 7 00 Doorphone 1 7 01 Doorphone Display Time Selection 1 7 04 Doorphone Ringing Pattern Selection 1 7 05 Doorphone Ring Frequency Selection Telephone ports A0 C0 are ports 100 120 ...

Page 586: ... the Memory Block 3 Use dial pad to change Day Mode Restriction Class 00 for Tel Port No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No OR D to go to next assigned Tel Port No B Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100 109 B Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110 119 B Cto enter C for Port Number 120 Default Values All Stations Class 00...

Page 587: ... the Memory Block 3 Use dial pad to change Night Mode Restriction Class 00 for Tel Port No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No OR D to go to next assigned Tel Port No B Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100 109 B Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110 119 B Cto enter C for Port Number 120 Default Values All Stations Class ...

Page 588: ...left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No OR D to go to next assigned Tel Port No B Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100 109 B Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110 119 B Cto enter C for Port Number 120 Default Values All Telephones Tenant 00 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Progr...

Page 589: ...________ Document Revision 4 Electra Elite IPK ___________________________________________________________________________________ Notes 1 Stations can be assigned to one of 48 Tenant Number 00 47 2 The Call Pickup group is determined by Tenant assignment 3 Telephone ports A0 C0 are ports 100 120 ...

Page 590: ...ss LK4 AKto access the Memory Block 3 Use dial pad to assign a 2 10 89 3 100 899 4 digit 1000 8999 or 5 7 4 digit 0000 9999 station number for Tel Port No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No OR D to go to next assigned Tel Port No B Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100 109 B Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110 119 B Ct...

Page 591: ...ne cannot have more than one station number 2 When changing Station Numbers to a different numbering plan perform the following steps in order a Select Station Numbers using Memory Block 1 2 03 2 3 or 4 digit Station Number Selection b Program applicable Access Code in Memory Block 1 1 46 Access Code 1 Digit Assignment 1 1 47 Access Code 2 Digit Assignment or 1 1 48 Access Code 3 Digit Assignment ...

Page 592: ... 3 Press CO PBX LK1 to prevent the Tel Port No station user from answering incoming ringing CO PBX calls by going off hook Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No OR D to go to next assigned Tel Port No B Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100 109 B Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110 119 B Cto enter C for Port Number 120 4 ...

Page 593: ...________________________________________________________________ Notes 1 Programming for this Memory Block applies to Ring Assigned telephones only 2 An intercom call cannot be originated after a ring assigned CO PBX line terminates on the telephone 3 Telephone ports A0 C0 are ports 100 120 4 PS II telephone ports should have ringing line preference set to Yes ...

Page 594: ... 2 05 Line Key Selection Display Settings Page 1 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default NON CO FW BNA FW ALL Call Appearance Key Feature Access Key TKGP Route Advance Page 2 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 SIE Microphone H SET SCROLL ANI Caller ID DND On Off LOG On Off BGM On Off ICM Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK4 ABto access the Memor...

Page 595: ...s LK7 to display the TKGP and enter 05 using the dial pad Default Values For Tel 01 CO LK01 08 Assigned to CO PBX lines 01 08 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Line Key No Programming Procedures Continued Setting Data Page 1 Line Key Functions For each telephone in tenant specified as Telephone Mode in Memory Block 2 05 Line Key Selection Setting Data 1 LCD Indication Setting Data 2...

Page 596: ...splayed 6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 2 05 Line Key Selection Tenant Mode 1 When an Electra Elite IPK system is installed as a Key Function KF system all COs must be assigned to the line keys Trunk groups Route Advance Blocks and Least Cost Routing LCR cannot be assigned 2 At system default line keys 09 24 are not ass...

Page 597: ... or Tel Port No OR D to go to next assigned Tel Port No B Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100 109 B Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110 119 B Cto enter C for Port Number 120 Setting Data Port No 01 96 Default Values Not specified 4 Press G to write the data and display Forward No 2 5 Enter second transfer Port No 6 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 7 Program the next Memory Blo...

Page 598: ...ne 2 Press LK4 ADto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change data option Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No OR D to go to next assigned Tel Port No B Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100 109 B Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110 119 B Cto enter C for Port Number 120 4 Press G to writ...

Page 599: ..._____________________________________________________ Notes 1 When YS is assigned an incoming internal call from another station Automated Attendant transferred call or DIT ANA DID Tie line designated call is forwarded to a station specified in Memory Block 4 15 Intercom Master Hunt Number Forward Assignment when the line is busy 2 Telephone ports A0 C0 are ports 100 120 ...

Page 600: ... Master Hunt Number Selection and the Intercom Master Hunt Number line is busy R2500 is required for 5 6 or 7 digit Extension Numbers Display R1700 or lower Display R2000 or higher The number displayed after the leading digits is from Memory Block 1 2 34 Expanded Station Number Assignment when assigned R2500 is required Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK4 AEto access the Memory Block ...

Page 601: ...100 109 B Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110 119 B Cto enter C for Port Number 120 Setting data Forward Station Number is one of the following 2 digit 10 89 3 digit 100 899 4 digit 1000 8999 5 digit X0000 X9999 6 digit XX0000 XX9999 7 digit XXX0000 XXX9999 Default Values All Telephones Not Specified 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or pres...

Page 602: ...umber Assignment Telephone Port Number and related Station Number H Memory Block 4 15 Intercom Master Hunt Number Forward Assignment Telephone Port Number Port Number forwards to Station Number 3 When 5 6 or 7 digit Extension Numbers are used the leading digits are assigned in Memory Block 1 2 34 Expanded Station Number Assignment and are displayed in this Memory Block when assigned 4 When 5 6 or ...

Page 603: ...Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No OR D to go to next assigned Tel Port No B Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100 109 B Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110 119 B Cto enter C for Port Number 120 4 Press G to write the data and display Table 2 data 5 Enter Table 2 Service Class and press G to write data and display the next Memory Block 6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Relat...

Page 604: ...s 1 Table 1 includes features that telephone ports 01 and 02 users are normally allowed to activate Select any Class pattern specified in Memory Block 1 8 07 Class of Service Attendant Feature Selection 1 2 Table 2 includes features that all telephones users are normally allowed to activate Select any Class pattern specified in Memory Block 1 8 08 Class of Service Station Feature Selection 2 3 Tel...

Page 605: ...he Memory Block 3 Use the dial pad to enter data Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No OR D to go to next assigned Tel Port No H to clear data when cursor is at setting data B Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100 109 B Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110 119 B Cto enter C for Port Number 120 Default Values Not Specified ...

Page 606: ... and name of the other party are displayed 2 The name is not displayed when Tone Override Automatic Callback or Callback Request is displayed 3 Only six digits characters can be used for each name 4 Telephone ports A0 C0 are ports 100 120 5 Refer to Appendix B Character Codes Section 1 Character Assignment on page B 1 for the procedure for entering station names using the dial pad instead of the A...

Page 607: ... LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Page 3 Ports 17 24 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Page 4 Ports 25 32 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Page 5 Ports 33 40 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 Page 6 Ports41 48 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 Page 7 Ports 49 56 LK 1 LK 2 ...

Page 608: ...etting data position B Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100 109 B Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110 119 B Cto enter C for Port Number 120 Default Values Not Restricted 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line 1 A restricted CO PBX line allows the station user to answer an incoming call or access a held call but does not ...

Page 609: ... 3 Use dial pad to enter telephone number 10 Digits max for Tel Port No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No OR D to go to next assigned Tel Port No B Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100 109 B Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110 119 B Cto enter C for Port Number 120 B and Jto input B andLto input Default Values Not Spe...

Page 610: ...odes 063 and 064 for Memory Blocks 1 1 46 Access Code 1 Digit Assignment and 1 1 47 Access Code 2 Digit Assignment 2 To call the specified station number or CO line on Hot Line go off hook 3 When using Prime Line an access code A and E or ICM key can be used to seize the intercom ICM Dialtone for internal call processing 4 To use Hot Line Assignment one of the following must be entered H Station N...

Page 611: ...s the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change data option Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No OR D to go to next assigned Tel Port No B Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100 109 B Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110 119 B Cto enter C for Port Number 120 4 Press G to write the data and display th...

Page 612: ...lock affects only Single Line Telephone stations assigned Prime Line in Memory Block 4 23 Prime Line Hot Line Assignment 2 When Prime Line is assigned to an Single Line Telephone hookflash drops the CO and issues intercom ICM dial tone when this Memory Block is set to disconnect 3 After a Single Line Telephone begins to dial out 9 hookflash follows Memory Block 1 3 02 SLT Hookflash Signal Selectio...

Page 613: ... Go off line 2 Press LK4 BFto access the Memory Block 3 Use the dial pad to assign DISA ID Buffer Number 01 to Station Port No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No OR D to go to next assigned Tel Port No B Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100 109 B Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110 119 B Cto enter C for Port Number 12...

Page 614: ...1 Go off line 2 Press LK4 BHto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change language option for Tel Port No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No OR D to go to next assigned Tel Port No B Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100 109 B Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110 119 B Cto enter C for Po...

Page 615: ...line 2 Press LK4 BIto access the Memory Block 3 Press LK2 if you want to enable the HFU U Unit for Tel Port No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No OR D to go to next assigned Tel Port No B Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100 109 B Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110 119 B Cto enter C for Port Number 120 4 Press G to w...

Page 616: ... Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No OR D to go to next assigned Tel Port No B Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100 109 B Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110 119 B Cto enter C for Port Number 120 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press G to go back on line ...

Page 617: ...isable Internal Zone or Internal All Zone page for Tel Port No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No OR D to go to next assigned Tel Port No B Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100 109 B Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110 119 B C3 to enter C for Port Number 120 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Bloc...

Page 618: ...llowing to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No OR D to go to next assigned Tel Port No B Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100 109 B Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110 119 B Cto enter C for Port Number 120 Default Values 00 No Limit 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to ...

Page 619: ... access the Memory Block 3 Press LK2 to interface Voice Mail with single line telephones for Tel Port No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No OR D to go to next assigned Tel Port No B Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100 109 B Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110 119 B Cto enter C for Port Number 120 4 Press G to write t...

Page 620: ...___________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ Notes 1 The SLT 1 U ADP Adapter and the ADA 2 W Unit do not support Voice Mail 2 Only 16 Voice Mail ports are supported by this system 3 Telephone ports A0 C0 are ports 100 120 ...

Page 621: ...ection is the default NO YS Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK4 CFto access the Memory Block 3 Press LK2 to allow voice prompt for Tel Port No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No OR D to go to next assigned Tel Port No B Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100 109 B Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110 119 B C...

Page 622: ...alls to a Secondary Incoming Extension SIE or a Call Arrival key Display Settings Page 1 Line Keys 01 08 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 Default not assigned 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Page 2 Line Keys 09 16 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Page 3 Line Keys 17 24 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press ...

Page 623: ...t page A to go to the previous page B Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100 109 B Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110 119 B Cto enter C for Port Number 120 Default Values All Telephones No Ring 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 2 26 Delayed Ringing Time Assignment IC...

Page 624: ...g calls to a Secondary Incoming Extension SIE or a Call Arrival Key Display Settings Page 1 Line Keys 01 08 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 Default not assigned 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Page 2 Line Keys 09 16 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Page 3 Line Keys 17 24 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Pre...

Page 625: ...t page A to go to the previous page B Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100 109 B Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110 119 B Cto enter C for Port Number 120 Default Values All Telephones No Ring 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 2 26 Delayed Ringing Time Assignment IC...

Page 626: ...ogramming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK4 CIto access the Memory Block 3 Press line key to specify ringing Mode for a single line telephone connected to an APR U Unit for Tel Port No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No OR D to go to next assigned Tel Port No B Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100 109 B Bto ente...

Page 627: ... Ring means that no calls ring at the Single Line Device connected to an AP R R or APR U Unit 2 Station Number ring means that only calls directed to the Multiline Terminal Station Number ring at the Single Line Device connected to an AP R R or APR U Unit 3 ALL ring means that all calls that ring at the Multiline Terminal also ring at the Single Line Device connected to an AP R R or APR U Unit 4 T...

Page 628: ...ng on the system configuration Display Settings LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default Numbers are LCR Classes 0 1 2 3 4 Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK4 DKto access the Memory Block 3 Press line key to specify LCR Class for Tel Port No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or...

Page 629: ...________________________ Notes 1 LCR Class Selection corresponds to Area Code Tables as follows Class 0 No LCR Class 1 Use Area Code Table 1 Class 2 Use Area Code Table 2 Class 3 Use Area Code Table 3 Class 4 Use Area Code Table 4 2 Stations cannot be assigned to multiple LCR Classes 3 The KMM 1 0 U must be installed on the MIFM U ETU to support this feature 4 Telephone ports A0 C0 are ports 100 1...

Page 630: ...6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default NO YS Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK4 DAto access the Memory Block 3 Press LK1 to disable Ringing Line Preference for SIE or CAR for Tel Port No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No OR D to go to next assigned Tel Port No B Ato enter A for Port Numb...

Page 631: ...K ___________________________________________________________________________________ Notes Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 4 37 Extension Line Key Ring Assignment Day Mode 4 38 Extension Line Key Ring Assignment Night Mode 1 Telephone ports A0 C0 are ports 100 120 2 The SIE CAR must be ringing for this Memory Block to work ...

Page 632: ... the default NO YS Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK4 DBto access the Memory Block 3 Press LK1for immediate forward to a station set to Call Forward Busy for Tel Port No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No OR D to go to next assigned Tel Port No B Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100 109 B Bto enter B ...

Page 633: ..._____________________ Document Revision 4 Electra Elite IPK ___________________________________________________________________________________ Notes Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 2 22 Call Forward No Answer Time Selection Telephone ports A0 C0 are ports 100 120 ...

Page 634: ...access the Memory Block 3 Use the dial pad to enter Call Appearance Block assignment for Tel Port No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No OR D to go to next assigned Tel Port No B Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100 109 B Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110 119 B Cto enter C for Port Number 120 Default Values All stati...

Page 635: ...Port No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No OR D to go to next assigned Tel Port No B Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100 109 B Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110 119 B Cto enter C for Port Number 120 Default Value Not specified 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory B...

Page 636: ...mming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK4 DFto access the Memory Block 3 Press LK2 to delete live record sessions not addressed by the user for Tel Port No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No OR D to go to next assigned Tel Port No B Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100 109 B Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110 119 B ...

Page 637: ... 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default YES NO Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK4 DGto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the Setting Data option 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Na...

Page 638: ... Number CPN Presentation from Station PRT firmware Version 3 50 or higher is required 2 When this Memory Block is set to No and ISDN PRI is used in CO Mode in Memory Block 3 91 the programmed number in Memory Block 3 52 is not presented as Caller ID The Network presents Restricted for the Caller ID information 3 When this Memory Block is set to YES and ISDN PRI is used in CO Mode in Memory Block 3...

Page 639: ... to next assigned Tel Port No B Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100 109 B Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110 119 B Cto enter C for Port Number 120 Default Value Not Specified 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line To display ANI Caller ID Indication for normal incoming CO calls and CAR incoming calls both ANI Caller ID...

Page 640: ...24 24A Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK4 EKto access the Memory Block 3 Press LK2 if you want 24 line keys for Tel Port No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No OR D to go to next assigned Tel Port No B Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100 109 B Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110 119 B Cto enter C for Por...

Page 641: ... LK10 LK11 LK12 OT 3 OT 11 LK9 LK10 LK11 LK12 LK19 LK23 LK13 LK14 LK15 LK16 OT 4 OT 12 LK13 LK14 LK15 LK16 LK20 LK24 OT 5 OT 13 OT 1 OT 5 OT 6 OT 14 OT 2 OT 6 OT 7 OT 15 OT 3 OT 7 OT 8 OT 16 OT 4 OT 8 DTH DTR 32D 1 TEL 16 Line Key Mode 24 Line Key Mode LK1 LK2 LK3 LK4 LK5 LK6 LK7 LK8 LK1 LK2 LK3 LK4 LK5 LK6 LK7 LK8 LK9 LK10 LK11 LK12 LK13 LK14 LK15 LK16 LK9 LK10 LK11 LK12 LK13 LK14 LK15 LK16 OT1 O...

Page 642: ...ess LK4 EAto access the Memory Block 3 Press LK2 to disable Off Hook Ringing for Tel Port No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No OR D to go to next assigned Tel Port No B Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100 109 B Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110 119 B Cto enter C for Port Number 120 Default Values All Terminals YS ...

Page 643: ...oming CO PBX call Display Settings LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default NO YS Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK4 EBto access the Memory Block 3 Press LK1 to disable ringing for answer key operation for Tel Port No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No OR D to go...

Page 644: ...__ ___________________________________________________________________________________ Notes 1 Telephone ports A0 C0 are ports 100 120 2 Ringing must be assigned in Memory Block 4 01 CO PBX Ring Assignment Day Mode for the YS choice to work When ringing is assigned and NO is assigned here the telephone does not ring during incoming CO PBX calls ...

Page 645: ...Display Settings LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default NO YS Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK4 ECto access the Memory Block 3 Press LK1 to press the answer key while an incoming CO line key is flashing to answer the call for Tel Port No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or...

Page 646: ..._ ___________________________________________________________________________________ Notes 1 Telephone ports A0 C0 are ports 100 120 2 Ringing must be assigned in Memory Block 4 02 CO PBX Ring Assignment Night Mode for the YS choice to work When ringing is assigned and NO is assigned here the telephone does not ring during incoming CO PBX calls ...

Page 647: ...ing dial pad Enter 7 or 10 digit code plus up to 5 digit extension number 15 digits maximum for Tel port No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No OR D to go to next assigned Tel Port No H to clear data when cursor is at setting data position B Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100 109 B Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110...

Page 648: ...________________________________________________________________________ Notes Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 8 43 Enhanced 911 Trunk Assignment 1 8 44 Enhanced 911 Alternate Route Assignment 1 8 45 Enhanced 911 Alternate Route Assignment Maintenance Busy 1 8 46 Enhanced 911 Dialing Digit Assignment Telephone ports A0 C0 are ports 100 120 ...

Page 649: ...K 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 Ringing Pattern H Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK4 EEto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to select the ringing pattern for Tel Port No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No OR D to go to next assigned Tel Port No C to go to the next...

Page 650: ...____ ___________________________________________________________________________________ Notes The Ring Patterns are shown in the table below Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 4 57 CO Line Ringing Pattern Priority Selection Telephone Ports A0 C0 are ports 100 120 s seconds Pattern A B C D E F G H NO No Ring 0s 1s 2s 3s 4s 5s 6s ...

Page 651: ...ss the Memory Block 3 Press LK2 to deny call record printing for Tel port No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No OR D to go to next assigned Tel Port No B Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100 109 B Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110 119 B Cto enter C for Port Number 120 4 Press G to write the data and display the next...

Page 652: ...amming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK4 EGto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No OR D to go to next assigned Tel Port No B Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100 109 B Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110 119 B Cto enter C for ...

Page 653: ..._ Document Revision 4 Electra Elite IPK ___________________________________________________________________________________ Notes Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 4 55 CO PBX Telephone Ringing Pattern Selection 3 67 CO PBX Ringing Pattern Selection Telephone Ports A0 C0 are ports 100 120 ...

Page 654: ...dures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK4 EHto access the Memory Block 3 Press the line key to specify Automated Attendant priority for Tel port No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No OR D to go to next assigned Tel Port No C to go to the next page A to go to the previous page B Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100 109 B Bto ...

Page 655: ... access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the setting data option Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No OR D to go to next assigned Tel Port No B Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100 109 B Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110 119 B Cto enter C for Port Number 120 4 Press G to write the d...

Page 656: ..._________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ Notes 4 95 DTMF DP SLT Type Selection The Single Line Telephone operates normally when connected to an AP R R APR U or AP A R APA U Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name ...

Page 657: ... Go off line 2 Press LK4 FBto access the Memory Block 3 Use the dial pad to enter data Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data OR D to go to the next TEL port number H to clear data 4 Press G to write the data and display Memory Block 4 01 5 Program Memory Block 4 01 or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Mem...

Page 658: ...__________________________________________________________________________ Notes 1 A maximum of 13 digits is allowed 2 Hyphens dashes are not allowed when entering the directory number 3 This Memory Block supports only trunks assigned as DID in Memory Block 3 91 4 When using CO Line Mode Memory Block 3 52 is used to assign the directory number for ISDN PRI ...

Page 659: ...ccount Code Authorization Code Display Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK4 FDto access the Memory Block 3 Use the dial pad to change Day Mode Restriction Class for Tel port No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No OR D to go to next assigned Tel Port No B Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100 109 B Bto ent...

Page 660: ...zation Code Access 1 8 07 Class of Service Attendant Feature Selection 1 Page 2 LK 8 Forced Account Code Authorization Code Programming 1 8 08 Class of Service Station Feature Selection 2 Page 5 LK 1 Forced Account Code Authorization Code Page 6 LK 3 Unverified for Forced Account Code Authorization Code 1 8 27 Forced Account Code Authorization Code Length Assignment 4 07 Code Restriction Class Ass...

Page 661: ...count Code Authorization Code Display Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK4 FEto access the Memory Block 3 Use the dial pad to change Night Mode Restriction Class for Tel port No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter Restriction Class or Tel Port No OR D to go to next assigned Tel Port No B Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100 109 B B...

Page 662: ...ization Code Access 1 8 07 Class of Service Attendant Feature Selection 1 Page 2 LK 8 Forced Account Code Authorization Code Programming 1 8 08 Class of Service Station Feature Selection 2 Page 5 LK 1 Forced Account Code Authorization Code Page 6 LK 3 Unverified for Forced Account Code Authorization Code 1 8 27 Forced Account Code Authorization Code Length Assignment 4 07 Code Restriction Class As...

Page 663: ... LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default MOH RBT Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK4 FFto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the setting data option Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter Tel Port No OR D to go to next assigned Tel Port No B Ato enter A for Port N...

Page 664: ...___________________________________________________________________________ Notes Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 8 09 Music on Hold Pattern Selection 1 8 31 Hold Tone Source Assignment 1 8 32 Hold Internal Tone Volume Selection 3 11 CO External Source Selection 3 12 Trunk to MOH Trunk Assignment Telephone Ports A0 C0 are ports 100 120 ...

Page 665: ...ine 2 Press LK4 FGto access the Memory Block 3 Use dial pad to assign a 2 10 89 3 100 899 or 4 digit 1000 8999 station number for each Tel Port No Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No OR D to go to next assigned Tel Port No B Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100 109 B Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110 119 B Cto enter C for Port Number 120 4 Press G ...

Page 666: ...on 1 2 34 Expanded Station Number Assignment 4 07 Code Restriction Class Assignment Day Mode 4 08 Code Restriction Class Assignment Night Mode 4 10 Station Number Assignment 4 40 LCR Class Selection 4 54 Enhanced 911 CESID to Station Table Assignment 4 56 SMDR Telephone Print Selection 1 The Electra Elite IPK Basic port package allows up to 30 IP Telephones to be installed using dedicated ports 73...

Page 667: ... D to go to next assigned Tel Port No B Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100 109 B Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110 119 B Cto enter C for Port Number 120 Default Value LK01 08 C0 01 08 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Line key and name 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each Line key assignment After Line key 16 is programmed the next Tel Port No is displayed When you want to program less than...

Page 668: ...ed based on the line key type from Memory Block 4 12 Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode LK Assign Default Note NON not assigned All Blank CO Outside Lines CO xx xx Port 01 64 Call Forward Busy No Answer CFB Call Forward All Calls CFA Call Appearance Keys CAP CAPxx yy xx Block 00 47 yy Key 01 24 Programmable One Touch Keys FA xx xx key 01 24 Trunk Group TKGP xx xx Trunk Group 01 32 Route Advance...

Page 669: ...gned for direct CO PBX appearances in Memory Block 4 12 Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode per line key per station R2000 or higher is required Display Settings Page 1 Line Keys 01 08 Page 2 Line Keys 09 16 Page 3 Line Keys 17 24 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 default not assigned 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK...

Page 670: ...ssed Off Not assigned On Red Assigned Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter Tel Port No OR D to go to next assigned Tel Port No C to go to the next page A to go to the previous page B Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100 109 B Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110 119 B Cto enter C for Port Number 120 4 Press G to write the data and advance to the ne...

Page 671: ...e following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No OR D to go to next assigned Tel Port No B Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100 109 B Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110 11 B Cto enter C for Port Number 120 Default Value LK01 16 Blank 4 Use dial pad to enter characters for each line key 5 Press G to write the data and display the next li...

Page 672: ...2 The name can be entered using the dial pad Follow the procedure in Appendix B Character Codes 3 Maximum of 120 Station Add On Consoles 4 The Station Add On Console cannot be connected to a 32 button terminal 5 The Station Add On Console can be used only for DSS BLF keys COs cannot be assigned to the Station Add On Console 6 When using the Station Add On Console Memory Block 4 50 Multiline Termin...

Page 673: ...pad to change Station to Timer Class of Service Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter Restriction Class or Tel Port No OR D to go to next assigned Tel Port No B Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100 109 B Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110 119 B Cto enter C for Port Number 120 Default Value Tel Ports 1 2 Class 1 All other ports Class 2 4 Press G to...

Page 674: ...orward No Answer Time Selection 1 2 23 System Call Park Recall Time Selection 1 4 02 Automated Attendant Transfer Delayed Ringing Time Selection 1 7 06 External Paging Timeout Selection 1 Telephone Ports 1 and 2 are in Station to Timer Class of Service Class 1 by default All other ports are in Station to Timer Class of Service Class 2 by default 2 When a system is upgraded from R2500 or below the ...

Page 675: ...to select DATA for Single Line Telephones for Tel Port No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No OR D to go to next assigned Tel Port No B Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100 109 B Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110 119 B Cto enter C for Port Number 120 Default Values Ports 01 CO NO 4 Press G to write the data and displ...

Page 676: ...nnecting Fax Modem assign DATA 2 When Multiline Terminal is assigned for Data Line Security Tone Override and Call Alert Notification tones are not heard from the handset however the tone is still sent and heard from the speaker when off hook 3 Data Line Security denies a station from barging in even if Barge In is allowed in Class of Service 4 When this Memory Block is set to DATA the Voice Overr...

Page 677: ...ine 2 Press LK4 IAto access the Memory Block 3 Press the line Key to select ringing frequency for Tel Port No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No OR D to go to next assigned Tel Port No B Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100 109 B Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110 119 B Cto enter C for Port Number 120 4 Press G to wr...

Page 678: ...____ ___________________________________________________________________________________ Notes 1 This Memory Block is applicable for telephones selected in Memory Block 1 1 28 Distinctive Ringing by Telephone or CO Selection 2 Selected ringing tone H M or L applies to incoming outside line calls only 3 Telephone ports A0 C0 are ports 100 120 ...

Page 679: ... the Memory Block 3 Press LK2 to keep volume UP after hanging up a call Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No OR D to go to next assigned Tel Port No B Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100 109 B Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110 119 B Cto enter C for Port Number 120 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memo...

Page 680: ...Go off line 2 Press LK4 ICto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to select internal page zone for Tel Port No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No OR D to go to next assigned Tel Port No B Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100 109 B Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110 119 B Cto enter C for P...

Page 681: ... Notes 1 Specify one zone All Internal Zones Paged by dialing 51 Zone A Paged by dialing 52 Zone B Paged by dialing 53 Zone C Paged by dialing 54 2 Telephones can be assigned to No Zone All Internal Zones page the telephone unless No Page Receive is assigned in Memory Block 4 31 Receiving Internal All Call Page Selection 3 All Internal Zones pages all of the idle Multiline Terminals 4 Telephone po...

Page 682: ...rning tone during a call for Tel port No Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No OR D to go to next assigned Tel Port No B Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100 109 B Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110 119 B Cto enter C for Port Number 120 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Mem...

Page 683: ...dures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK4 IEto access the Memory Block 3 Press LK1 to specify Dial Pulse for single line telephones connected to the system Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No OR D to go to next assigned Tel Port No B Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100 109 B Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110 119 B Cto enter C...

Page 684: ...ing CO PBX line key to enter the data Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data D to go to the next Trunk Group No Setting Data 000 No Addition or Deletion 001 009 1 9 Add 010 0 Digit Add 100 199 00 99 Add 201 1 Digit Delete 202 2 Digit Delete 301 309 1 Digit Delete and 1 9 Add 310 1 Digit Delete and 0 Add 400 499 1 Digit Delete and...

Page 685: ...g M B Number Memory Block Name 1 1 46 Access Code 1 Digit Assignment 3 03 Trunk to Trunk Group Assignment 1 This Memory Block applies only when two or more systems are connected by Tie lines or when the systems are connected by a DID line 2 When the call is intended for another system the Tie line is directed to send the number again 3 At default DID lines are not assigned to a Trunk group 4 This ...

Page 686: ...m allow incoming Trunk groups to be connected to outgoing Trunk groups for tandem connections Display Settings Page 1 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the default 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 Page 2 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Page 3 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Page 4 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK ...

Page 687: ...cludes Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right C to go to the next page A to go to the previous page D to go to the next Trunk Group No 4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 3 03 Trunk to Trunk Group Assignment 4 09 Teleph...

Page 688: ...age 2 LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 Table 08 Table 09 Table 10 Table 11 Table 12 Table 13 Table 14 Table 15 Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK5 G KBto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the data option Operation data includes Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right C to go to the next page A ...

Page 689: ...K 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 Table 08 Table 09 Table 10 Table 11 Table 12 Table 13 Table 14 Table 15 Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK5 G KCto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to enter the data Operation data includes Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right C to go to the next page A to go to the pr...

Page 690: ... 3 4 Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK5 G KDto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the Setting Data option 4 Press G to write the data The next Memory Block is displayed 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 3 70 CIC Number Assignment 1 1 05 Start Time Selection 1 1 46 48 ...

Page 691: ..._________ Notes 1 15 07 K CCIS Message Response Timeout Assignment 1 15 08 Link Reconnect Allow Deny Selection 1 15 09 K CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Assignment 1 15 10 Calling Name Display Allow Deny Selection 5 05 Common Signaling Channel Route Selection Refer to the Electra Elite IPK Key Common Channel Interoffice Signaling K CCIS Manual for details Related Programming Continued M B Number ...

Page 692: ...alues 0 Not Assigned CCH 1 4 3 Press G to write the data 4 Press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 3 70 CIC Number Assignment 1 1 05 Start Time Selection 1 1 46 48 Access Code 1 2 or 3 Digit Assignment 1 15 00 K CCIS Main Remote Office Selection 1 15 01 Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignment 1 15 02 Common Signal Channel Assignment 1 15 03 Originating Point...

Page 693: ...___________________________________ Notes 1 15 09 K CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Assignment 1 15 10 Calling Name Display Allow Deny Selection 5 4 LCR Class to Trunk Group Selection This Memory Block is used to assign the voice channels to the Common Channel When the voice channels trunk group is set at 0 K CCIS does not operate correctly Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name ...

Page 694: ...Fto access the Memory Block 3 Press the corresponding CO PBX line key to change the Setting Data option 4 Press G to write the data The next Memory Block is displayed 5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on line Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 1 1 46 48 Access Code 1 2 or 3 Digit Assignment Function 201 232 Route Advance Block 01 32 Function 401 416 Closed Number ...

Page 695: ...__________________________________________________________________________ Document Revision 4 Electra Elite IPK ___________________________________________________________________________________ THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 696: ...ant to another tenant or multiple consecutive tenants Display Example To copy data of Tenant 00 to Tenant 05 07 1 Enter the original Tenant No Using the dial pad press KK 2 Press G Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK6 LK2 to access the Memory Block 3 Enter the tenant to be copied Use the following to enter data K Ito enter numeric data H to clear all data when placed at cursor position...

Page 697: ...___________________________________________________________________________________ 3 Enter the beginning of the tenant 00 47 range to be copied to Using the dial pad press KE 4 Enter the end of the tenant 00 47 range to be copied to Using the dial pad press KG 5 Press G T N A T 0 5 T I M E D I S P L A Y T N A T 0 5 0 7 T I M E D I S P L A Y ...

Page 698: ...nsecutive CO PBX lines Display Example To copy data of CO PBX line 01 to CO PBX line 05 07 1 Enter the original CO PBX No Using the dial pad press KA 2 Press G Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK6 LK3 to access the Memory Block 3 Enter the CO PBX line to be copied Use the following to enter data K Ito enter numeric data H to clear all data when placed at cursor position Copy Mode 6 CO ...

Page 699: ...IPK ___________________________________________________________________________________ 3 Enter the beginning of the CO PBX 02 64 range to be copied to Using the dial pad press KE 4 Enter the end of the CO PBX 02 64 range to be copied to Using the dial pad press KG 5 Press G C O 0 5 T I M E D I S P L A Y C O 0 5 0 7 T I M E D I S P L A Y ...

Page 700: ...ne port or multiple consecutive telephone ports Display Example To copy data of telephone port 01 to telephone ports 20 30 1 Enter the original Tel No Using the dial pad pressKA 2 Press G Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK6 LK4 to access the Memory Block 3 Enter the Tel Port No to be copied Use the following to enter data K Ito enter numeric data H to clear all data when placed at cur...

Page 701: ...________________________________________________________________________________ 3 Enter the beginning of the Tel Port No 01 C0 range to be copied to Using the dial pad press BK 4 Enter the end of the Tel Port No 01 C0 range to be copied to Using the dial pad press CK 5 Press G T E L 2 0 T I M E D I S P L A Y T E L 2 0 3 0 T I M E D I S P L A Y ...

Page 702: ...k groups Display Example To copy data of Trunk Group 01 to Trunk Groups 10 14 1 Enter the original Trunk Group Using the dial pad press KA 2 Press G 3 Enter the Trunk Group Using the dial pad press AK AD Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK6 LK5 to access the Memory Block 3 Enter the Trunk group to be copied Use the following to enter data K Ito enter numeric data H to clear all data wh...

Page 703: ...on 4 Electra Elite IPK ___________________________________________________________________________________ 4 Enter the Start Trunk Group No 01 32 Using the dial pad press AK 5 Enter the End Trunk Group 01 32 Using the dial pad press AD 6 Press G T R K G P 1 0 T I M E D I S P L A Y T R K G P 1 0 1 4 T I M E D I S P L A Y ...

Page 704: ...umber for COI 8 TLI DID ESI 8 SLI 8 BRT Port Number for ESIB 16 ETU Port Number for DTI or PRT ETU Mode 7 Slot 1 Data No PC Programming BS 1 0 9 N O N 1 0 1 C O I 4 0 1 Page No Upper Slot No Port No 1st of 4 Unit Name Lower Slot No Cabinet No 1 3 Page No Upper Slot No Port No 1st of 4 Port No 1st of 4 Unit Name Lower Slot No Cabinet No 1 3 1 0 9 0 5 1 0 1 E S I 8 0 1 Page No Upper Slot No Port No ...

Page 705: ...or COIB 8 U in COI Mode COI 8 4 NON 5 COID 4 U or COIB 4 U COID Mode COID 4 6 COID 8 U or COIB 4 U COID Mode COID 8 7 TLI 2 U TLI 8 DID 4 U DID Line Key Setting Data Page 2 LCD Indication 1 ESI 8 U ESI 8 2 NON 3 SLI 8 CNF 8 U SLI 8 4 OPX 2 U OPX 5 VDH2 8 U Refer to Note 7 VDH 6 DPH 4 U DPH 7 PBR U PBR 8 ECR U ECR Line Key Setting Data Page 3 LCD Indication 1 VRS 4 U VRS 2 NON 3 VMS 2 4 FMS 2 4 U C...

Page 706: ...Key Setting Data Page 5 LCD Indication 1 ESIB 8 U R3000 or higher ESIB8 2 ESIE 8 U R3000 or higher ESIB16 3 MG 8 U R2500 or higher MG 4 HUB 8 U R1500 or higher HUB 5 NON 6 NON 7 NON 8 NON Line Key Setting Data Page 6 LCD Indication 1 DTI U DTI4 2 DTI U DTI8 3 DTI U DTI12 4 DTI U DTI16 5 DTI U DTI20 6 DTI U DTI24 7 NON 8 NON Line Key Setting Data Page 7 LCD Indication 1 PRT 1 U PRT4 2 PRT 1 U PRT8 ...

Page 707: ... back on line NO of ESI 8 ETUs NO of ESI Ports Either EliteMail VP CTI Maximum NO of ACD CMS FMS VMP VMS IPC MG IVR IPT IAD SLI OPX BSU 4M BSU 2S BSU 6S or DID ETUs Other ETUs 10 80 0 2 No Limitation 9 72 0 2 No Limitation 8 64 0 3 No Limitation 7 56 0 4 No Limitation 6 48 0 5 No Limitation 5 40 0 5 No Limitation 4 32 0 6 No Limitation 3 24 0 6 No Limitation 2 16 0 7 No Limitation 1 8 0 7 No Limit...

Page 708: ...32 1 3 No Limitation 3 24 1 4 No Limitation 2 16 1 4 No Limitation 1 8 1 5 No Limitation The number of 8 port ESI ETUs installed including ESI 8 U ESIB 8 U or ESIE 8 U ETU When the SPE M U ETU or the MIFM U20 ETU with Ethernet option installed is installed in the AP slot the HUB 8 U ETU or Elite Mail CIT VP must be installed in a different cabinet Only one CTI ETU can be installed in a KSU EliteMa...

Page 709: ...X DTI U CO PBX Line X X ECR U ECR X X ESI 8 U Station X X ESIB 8 U Station X X ESIB 8 U with ESIE 8 U Station X X EXPT 2 U CO PBX Line X 2 FMS 2 4 8 U Station X X HUB 8 U HUB X 3 X 3 MG 8 U CO PBX Line X X MIFA U MIFA X 1 X 1 MIFM U10 MIFM U20 SPE M MIFM X 1 X 1 OPX 2 U Station X X PBR U PBR X X PRT 1 U CO PBX Line X X SLI 4 U Station X X SLI 8 U CNF 8 U Station X X TLI 2 U CO PBX Line X X VDH2 8 ...

Page 710: ...ce slot assignment to a different ETU use the following procedure a Remove the ETU installed in the slot Power off ACD 8 VoIP VMS IPCA or FMS ETU before removing it b Program the slot for new ETU in this Memory Block c Install the new ETU 5 VMS 2 FMS 2 U ETU must be assigned as a VMS 4 FMS 4 U ETU 6 Eight BSU 2 U ETUs can be installed in the EXP Electra Elite IPK Only three can be installed in the...

Page 711: ..._______________________________________________________________ Related Programming M B Number Memory Block Name 7 3 00 MIF ACD Assignment 7 3 01 MIF LCR Assignment 7 3 02 MIF SMDR Assignment 7 3 03 MIF UCD Assignment 7 3 04 MIF Caller ID Assignment 1 2 04 Call Arrival Key Block Assignment 1 2 21 PS Telephone Block Assignment 1 2 32 IP Telephone Block Assignment ...

Page 712: ... To change data press the corresponding CO PBX line key Use the following to enter data D to go to next assigned ESl Port No or cycle back to 1 4 Press G to write the data 5 Press E to go back on line 1 Only Multiline Terminals can be assigned to ports 01 and 02 2 A maximum of four Attendant Add On Consoles can be installed in the system 3 A maximum of eight SLT 1 U ADP adapters can be installed i...

Page 713: ... of the MIFA U ETU Display Notes Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK7 LK3 to access the Memory Block 3 Use the dial pad to enter data Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data Setting Data 00 01 02 Default Values No Assignment 00 4 Press G to write the data 5 Press E to go back on line The ACD feature requires a KMA 1 0 ...

Page 714: ...tes Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK7 LK3 JAto access the Memory Block 3 Use the dial pad to enter data Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data Setting Data 00 01 02 Default Value No Assignment 00 4 Press G to write the data 5 Press E to go back on line 1 The LCR feature requires a KMM 1 0 U to be installed on the M...

Page 715: ...Detail Reporting SMDR function on the MIFM U ETU or the SPE M U ETU Display Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK7 LK3 JBto access the Memory Block 3 Use the dial pad to enter data Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data Setting Data 00 01 02 Default Values No Assignment 00 4 Press G to write the data 5 Press E to go bac...

Page 716: ...m Call Distribution UCD function on the MIFA U ETU Display Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK7 LK3 JCto access the Memory Block 3 Use the dial pad to enter data Use the following are used when entering data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data Setting Data 00 01 02 Default Values No Assignment 00 4 Press G to write the data 5 Press E to go back o...

Page 717: ...lled Display Notes Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK7 LK3 JDto access the Memory Block 3 Use the dial pad to enter data Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right K Ito enter numeric data Setting Data 00 01 02 Default Values No Function 00 4 Press G to write the data 5 Press E to go back on line 1 ANI Caller ID scrolling and outdial must have t...

Page 718: ...irmware version without removing the card from the KSU Display Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK8 LK1 to access the Memory Block 3 Enter data using the Dial Pad Use the following to enter data Jto move the cursor left Lto move the cursor right A H Cabinet No 1 3 Lower Slot No 1 8 I Slot Number A K Slot Number B C Slot Number C 4 Press G to advance to the next lower Slot No 5 Press E ...

Page 719: ...to access the Memory Block 3 The system display indicates CLR SYS SPD and the first four CO PBX lines light red 4 Press HAHIto enter the fixed password When each number of the password is being entered the applicable top line CO PBX LED changes from red to green 5 Press G to write the data 6 Press E to go back on line Special Mode 8 Spd Clr Sys 2 Data No PC Programming BE Before using this procedu...

Page 720: ...ogramming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK8 LK3 to access the Memory Block 3 The system display indicates CLR SYS SPD and the first four CO PBX lines light red 4 Press HBIIto enter the fixed password When each number of the password is being entered the applicable top line CO PBX LED changes from red to green Special Mode 8 Spd Clr Sys 3 Data No PC Programming BE Before using this procedure und...

Page 721: ...___________________________________________________ Document Revision 4 Electra Elite IPK ___________________________________________________________________________________ 5 Press G to write the data 6 Press E to go back on line Programming Procedures ...

Page 722: ... are retained after the Second Initialization Display Programming Procedures 1 Go off line 2 Press LK8 LK8 to access the Memory Block 3 When the system display prompt indicates CPU RESET the first four CO PBX lines light red 4 Press HHKKto enter the fixed password When each number of the password is being entered the applicable top line CO PBX LED changes from red to green 5 Press G to begin the i...

Page 723: ...dures 1 Press A 2 Dial I 3 Dial L 4 Dial current time e g KC BI 5 Press C to toggle AM PM 6 Press H to advance to the calendar 7 Press C to select the day of the week 8 Dial Lto move the cursor to the day of the month setting 9 Enter the date using the dial pad K I 10 Press C to select the month 11 Dial Lto move the cursor to the year setting 12 Enter the last two digits of the year using the dial...

Page 724: ...is fixed and denies all outside calls Classes 01 14 are programmable in system software Stations are assigned per station to a Code Restriction Class A separate Day Mode and Night Mode station to Code Restriction Class assignment is available 1 2 Default Assignments All stations are assigned to Code Restriction Class 00 for both Day and Night Mode to allow free dialing Code Restriction Classes are...

Page 725: ...ction 3 91 PBX CTX Access Code Assignment I 1 1 24 PBX CTX Access Code Assignment II 1 1 25 OCC Table Assignment 1 1 67 OCC Table to Trunk Group Assignment 5 03 8 Digit Matching Table to OCC Table Assignment 1 1 68 8 Digit Matching Table to Normal Dial Assignment 1 1 66 8 Digit Matching Table to Trunk Group Assignment 5 02 8 Digit Matching Table Assignment 1 1 60 8 Digit Matching Table to Class As...

Page 726: ...d System Programming has 16 OCC Tables 01 16 Each table can have one OCC Access Code assigned OCC Table to Trunk Group Assignment Memory Block 5 03 This Memory Block assigns Trunk groups to the OCC Tables Any combination of Trunk groups can be assigned to the OCC Tables 8 Digit Matching Table to OCC Table Assignment Memory Block 1 1 68 This Memory Block assigns the 8 Digit Matching Table to the OC...

Page 727: ...1 60 This Memory Block assigns the 8 Digit Matching Tables Each 8 Digit Matching Table can have 16 8 digit entries To cover the many possible combinations without listing each individual number code restriction letters can be used in place of digits The code restriction letters used and their numerical values are as follows X 0 9 and P 0 and 1 N 2 9 When 1X is entered in a table and the table is a...

Page 728: ...the 8 Digit Matching Tables assigned to the Code Restriction Class the station is assigned to and has the Trunk group assigned to it for the in use trunk the station is on When a match is found the system looks at the 8 Digit Matching Table to Class Assignment for the Allow or Deny Assignment When the table is assigned as Allow the call is allowed When the table is assigned as Deny the call is den...

Page 729: ... code restriction to the remaining digits The codes are sent to the CO as the leading digits on permitted code restriction calls 1 4 8 Trunk Digit Restriction Assignment Memory Block 4 32 This Memory Block specifies per station the maximum number of digits that can be dialed from any outside line 1 4 9 Code Restriction Class Assignment Day Mode Memory Block 4 07 This Memory Block specifies per sta...

Page 730: ...unk Group 01 32 Memory Block 1 1 68 Table 09 Memory Block 1 1 67 Memory Block 5 03 Trunk Group 01 32 Memory Block 1 1 68 Table 13 Memory Block 1 1 67 Memory Block 5 03 Trunk Group 01 32 Memory Block 1 1 68 Table 02 Trunk Group 01 32 Table 06 Trunk Group 01 32 Table 10 Trunk Group 01 32 Table 14 Trunk Group 01 32 Table 03 Trunk Group 01 32 Table 07 Trunk Group 01 32 Table 11 Trunk Group 01 32 Table...

Page 731: ... Matching Table to Trunk Group Assignment 5 02 8 Digit Matching Table Assignment 1 1 60 The following designations are used in these tables Table 00 Table 01 Table 02 Table 03 Memory Block 1 1 66 Use Table Use Table Use Table Use Table Memory Block 5 02 Trunk Group 01 32 Trunk Group 01 32 Trunk Group 01 32 Trunk Group 01 32 Memory Block 1 1 60 00 9 1 1 00 00 00 01 01 01 01 02 02 02 02 03 03 03 03 ...

Page 732: ...Trunk Group Assignment 5 02 8 Digit Matching Table Assignment 1 1 60 Table 04 Table 05 Table 06 Table 07 Memory Block 1 1 66 Use Table Use Table Use Table Use Table Memory Block 5 02 Trunk Group 01 32 Trunk Group 01 32 Trunk Group 01 32 Trunk Group 01 32 Memory Block 1 1 60 00 00 00 00 01 01 01 01 02 02 02 02 03 03 03 03 04 04 04 04 05 05 05 05 06 06 06 06 07 07 07 07 08 08 08 08 09 09 09 09 10 10...

Page 733: ... Trunk Group Assignment 5 02 8 Digit Matching Table Assignment 1 1 60 Table 08 Table 09 Table 10 Table 11 Memory Block 1 1 66 Use Table Use Table Use Table Use Table Memory Block 5 02 Trunk Group 01 32 Trunk Group 01 32 Trunk Group 01 32 Trunk Group 01 32 Memory Block 1 1 60 00 00 00 00 0 01 01 01 01 02 02 02 02 03 03 03 03 04 04 04 04 05 05 05 05 06 06 06 06 07 07 07 07 08 08 08 08 09 09 09 09 10...

Page 734: ...roup Assignment 5 02 8 Digit Matching Table Assignment 1 1 60 Table 12 Table 13 Table 14 Table 15 Memory Block 1 1 66 Use Table Use Table Use Table Unused Table Memory Block 5 02 Trunk Group 01 32 Trunk Group 01 32 Trunk Group 01 32 Trunk Group 01 32 Memory Block 1 1 60 00 9 7 6 00 1 8 0 0 00 1 X 00 X 01 01 1 8 8 8 01 01 02 02 1 8 7 7 02 02 03 03 03 03 04 04 04 04 05 05 05 05 06 06 06 06 07 07 07 ...

Page 735: ...w Deny Selection 1 1 65 1 6 Code Restriction Algorithm The following chart identifies how the system checks for and processes Code Restriction assignments 8 Digit Matching Table Class Allow Deny Assignment 8 Digit Matching Table to Class Assignment 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 Class 01 A D D D Allow Class 02 A D A D D Allow Class 03 A D D A D D Allow Class 04 A A D D Allow Class...

Page 736: ...w User to Dial up to 6 More Digits Search OCC Tables From Tables 01 16 OCC Table Assignment M B 1 1 67 Allow User Free Dialing 1 Class 01 14 Class 00 No Yes No No Match Found 0 2 9 2 Match Found Yes Disconnect Issue Error Class 15 Search Only 8 Digit Matching Tables Assigned To Normal Dial M B 1 1 66 Search Only 8 Digit Matching Tables Assigned To Class Assignment M B 1 1 61 Search Only 8 Digit Ma...

Page 737: ... Tables Assigned to OCC Table M B 1 1 68 Search Only 8 digit Matching Tables Assigned For Trunk Group Being Used M B 5 02 1 2 Allow User Free Dialing Match Found Deny Table Note 1 No Perfect Match Found or Duplicate Match in Opposite Tables Allow User Free Dialing Disconnect Issue Error Allow Deny Note 1 Tables are assigned as Allow or Deny in the 8 Digit Matching Table to Class Assignment Memory ...

Page 738: ... digits from or add digits to a user specified dialing number to use ARS to originate the call with LCR 2 2 Memory Blocks The following related Memory Blocks are used when assigning ARS Memory Title Block Access Code 1 Digit Assignment 1 1 46 Class of Service Station Feature Selection 2 1 8 08 ARS Allow Deny Selection 1 14 00 ARS Dialing Assignment 1 14 01 ARS Dial Allow Deny Selection 1 14 02 ARS...

Page 739: ...lection Memory Block 1 14 00 Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not to Allow ARS to function system wide Default NO 2 3 4 ARS Dialing Assignment Memory Block 1 14 01 Use this Memory Block to assign a dialing plan to one of four LCR tables A maximum of 128 up to 8 digits dialing combinations are possible for each table Default Not Assigned 2 3 5 ARS Dial Allow Deny Selection Memory Block 1...

Page 740: ...cify a maximum of 10 digits to add to the route assignment Default Not Assigned 2 3 10 ARS Max Digit Assignment Memory Block 1 14 07 Use this Memory Block to specify the number of digits to be collected by the system before the message is sent to the network Default Not Specified 2 3 11 Trunk to Trunk Group Assignment Memory Block 3 03 Use this Memory Block to assign a Trunk Group number to each C...

Page 741: ...f necessary H 1 1 46 9 Trunk Group 1 H 1 8 08 Page 3 LK4 Deny H 1 14 00 YS H 1 14 01 1 1972751 H 1 14 02 YS H 1 14 03 Table 1 Route 01 H 1 14 04 TKGP 04 H 1 14 05 01 Digit H 1 14 06 1010288 H 3 03 CO lines 01 02 to TKGP 1 CO lines 03 04 to TKGP 2 CO lines 05 06to TKGP 3 CO lines 07 08 to TKGP 4 H 3 91 Assign trunks 01 08 for CO H 4 40 TEL 100 assigned to class 1 2 Press E Dial tone is heard Speake...

Page 742: ..._______________________________________________ 5 Dial A CO8 Line key is green The LCD top display shows 1972751 6 Dial GFDE Ringback Tone is heard The LCD top display shows 19727517645 7 When you go Off hook to converse E goes off and display changes to call time and Clock Calendar 8 The system actually dialed 1010288 9727517645 on CO8 of Trunk Group 4 after the route was selected ...

Page 743: ... Dial MB1 14 01 01 1X 02 NX 03 1 800 04 1 900 128 1 800 Table Value LCR Class Dial Combinations Route TKGP RAB Delete digits Add digits 1 4 01 128 01 32 01 32 01 32 Up to 10 Up to 10 From CPU MB 1 14 00 MIFM LCR Originate Deny END Allow Allow ARS MB1 14 02 YES YES YES NO YES Route Number MB1 14 03 01 02 03 04 32 TKGP RAB Assignment Route MB1 14 04 01 NORMAL 02 TKGP 03 RAB 04 N A 32 TKGP To TKGP 01...

Page 744: ..._________________________________________________________________________________ Table 3 1 Automatic Route Selection to Route Number Assignment Table 1 4 Dialing Combination Digits Max 8 Memory Block 1 14 01 Allow Deny M B 1 14 02 Route Number M B 1 14 03 01 32 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 ...

Page 745: ...________________________________________ Document Revision 4 Electra Elite IPK 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 Table 3 1 Automatic Route Selection to Route Number Assignment Continued Table 1 4 Dialing Combination Digits Max 8 Memory Block 1 14 01 Allow Deny M B 1 14 02 Route Number M B 1 14 03 01 32 ...

Page 746: ...____________________________________________________________________________ 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 Table 3 1 Automatic Route Selection to Route Number Assignment Continued Table 1 4 Dialing Combination Digits Max 8 Memory Block 1 14 01 Allow Deny M B 1 14 02 Route Number M B 1 14 03 01 32 ...

Page 747: ..._______________________________ Document Revision 4 Electra Elite IPK 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 Table 3 1 Automatic Route Selection to Route Number Assignment Continued Table 1 4 Dialing Combination Digits Max 8 Memory Block 1 14 01 Allow Deny M B 1 14 02 Route Number M B 1 14 03 01 32 ...

Page 748: ...22 123 124 125 126 127 128 Table 3 2 Route Number to Trunk Group RAB Selection and Digit Control Route Number M B 1 14 03 NORMAL TKGP 01 32 or RAB 01 32 M B 1 14 04 Delete Digits 00 10 M B 1 14 05 Add Digits 10 Max M B 1 14 06 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 Table 3 1 Automatic Route Selection to Route Number Assignment Continued Table 1 4 Dialing Combination Digits Max 8 Memory Block 1 14 01 ...

Page 749: ...sing the MIFM U ETU is disabled H The MIFM U ETU is required for charge display to function H The ARS dialing numbers are checked according to the following priorities Complete table match Allow Deny in the order 0 9 or P N or X Data sorted in the order 0 9 or P N or X H The program cannot detect 1 it must be entered in the table 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Table 3 ...

Page 750: ...L origination in USA is Trunk Group 1 H When a dialing number is not subjected to ARS it is either originated according to the LCR bypass specification or busy H When ARS begins checking a received number a 10 second timer is set When timeout occurs ARS ends and normal origination is performed 2 6 ARS Flowcharts The flowcharts show how origination by Trunk Group 1 is determined When the call is no...

Page 751: ...________________________________________________________________ Document Revision 4 Electra Elite IPK Start MIFM LCR Originate MB 1 14 00 Allow Deny Code Restriction Assigned MB 1 1 82 MB 4 40 LCR Class Selection If Digits Match Continue 1 Allow Trunk Group 1 Originated by Dialing Deny 2 Automatic Route Selection Flowcharts 1 4 0 ...

Page 752: ...____________________________________________________________ Check ARS Allow Deny M B 1 14 02 Deny Match Dial Busy No Which TKGP or RAB TKGP 01 32 RAB 01 32 4 1 Yes Route Number to TKGP RAB Check 3 Allow 2 2 ARS Table Dial Check Refer to Service Conditions LCR ByPass M B 1 8 08 No Yes Trunk Group 1 Originate Allow No Call Busy Memory Block 1 14 03 Memory Block 1 14 04 ...

Page 753: ..._____________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ Document Revision 4 Electra Elite IPK TKGP RAB meets condition Seize Trunk and Dial Digit Add Del 2 3 Yes No END 4 MB 1 14 05 MB 1 14 06 ...

Page 754: ...ether calls that exceed the restriction are rejected or diverted For outgoing calls the KTS counts the number of calls in progress per group and rejects excess calls For Call by Call to operate the number of B channels used for PRI must be specified using Memory Block 1 13 00 PRT Channel Assignment and Call by Call service must be assigned to each PRT using Memory Block 1 13 03 Call by Call Servic...

Page 755: ...2 Caller Name Indication Selection 3 53 Trunk Type Selection 3 91 Trunk Installed DP DTMF Selection 3 92 CO PBX Ring Assignment Day Mode 4 01 CO PBX Ring Assignment Night Mode 4 02 Telephone to Tenant Assignment 4 09 Line key Selection for Telephone Mode 4 12 Station to Call Appearance Block Assignment 4 43 Multiline Terminal Type Selection 4 50 PRT Channel Assignment 1 13 00 Call by Call Service ...

Page 756: ...git Conversion Assignment Memory Block 1 1 21 Use this Memory Block to enable the DID Digit Conversion table Default NO 3 3 3 DID Digit Conversion Table Memory Block 1 1 22 Use this Memory Block to assign DID numbers to ring at station numbers closed number plus outgoing digits or tenant number Default Not Specified 3 3 4 DID Forward Station Number for Busy Station or Undefined Digit Memory Block ...

Page 757: ...igits dialed Default 4s 3 3 9 SLT or Automated Attendant DISA to CPU PBR Selection Memory Block 1 8 01 Use this Memory Block to specify whether the PBR circuits in the CPU are for Single Line Telephones or Automated Attendant DISA Default SLT 3 3 10 PBR Receive Level Assignment for Automated Attendant DISA Memory Block 1 8 02 Use this Memory Block to Specify the receiving level at the Automated At...

Page 758: ...16 Trunk Incoming Answer Mode Selection Memory Block 3 05 Use this Memory Block to specify the incoming answer mode per outside line as NO ASSIGN Normal TANDM TRF automatic trunk to trunk transfer or AA Automated Attendant DISA Default NO ASSIGN 3 3 17 Automatic Release Signal Detection Selection Memory Block 3 40 Use this Memory Block to specify signal detection time for release of a CO PBX line ...

Page 759: ...cify an external line as NIL Not connected DP 10 pps DP 20 pps or MF DTMF Default MF 3 3 24 CO PBX Ring Assignment Day Mode Memory Block 4 01 Use this Memory Block to assign incoming CO PBX calls to ring on Multiline Terminals in the Day mode Default Lines 01 08 ring at telephone ports 01 and 02 3 3 25 CO PBX Ring Assignment Night Mode Memory Block 4 02 Use this Memory Block to assign incoming CO ...

Page 760: ...by Call Service Selection Memory Block 1 13 03 Use this Memory Block to specify whether YS or not NO Call by Call is specified per PRT line Default NO 3 3 32 Call by Call Type of Number Assignment Memory Block 1 10 02 Use this Memory Block to specify a TN for each Route Advance Block RAB as 0 Unknown 1 International 2 National 3 Network Specific or 4 Subscriber or local Default 0 for all RABs 3 3 ...

Page 761: ... All RABs are unspecified 3 3 37 Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment Service Memory Block 1 10 05 Use this Memory Block to specify Facility Coding Value Service for each RAB as specified by the Memory Block table Default All blocks 00 None 3 3 38 Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment Feature Memory Block 1 10 06 Use this Memory Block to specify Facility Coding Value Feature for e...

Page 762: ... Facility Group SFGs for OUTWATS can be defined for outgoing calls per individual OUTWATS service For IntraLATA and banded OUTWATS an SFG is assigned to each band For InterLATA OUTWATS an SFG is assigned to each IC SFGs for INWATS can be defined for incoming calls per INWATS called DN 3 3 42 Call by Call Outgoing SFG Assignment Memory Block 1 10 20 Use this Memory Block to specify an outgoing SFG ...

Page 763: ...dial when using PRT H PreDigits controls whether digits that are specified in pre digit tables are dialed before the International or Operator code H When TG RAB is not assigned outgoing calls cannot be made 3 4 2 The OCC Table This Table has 16 pages called Table 1 Table 16 that are required for each of the LCR Classes for a total of 64 tables with fixed dialing patterns H Dial means following th...

Page 764: ...rator code H When TG RAB is not assigned outgoing calls cannot be made H When an unassigned OCC number is dialed route selection is bypassed 3 4 3 Operator Call Time Out Table Example This table specifies a timeout 0 9 seconds that is used to distinguish between 0 and 00 of an Operator Call OCC Table Example Tables 64 01 16 for each Class OCC Dial Dial Priority TG RAB Delete Digits PreDigits Add N...

Page 765: ... Example Ensure that the following items are assigned or registered Memory Block Setting 7 1 S1 MIFM S2 ESITEL01 08 S4 PRTCO 01 24 S7 COICO 25 32 1 1 20 4 Digits 1 1 21 YS 1 1 22 DID number 2000 Station number 100 1 1 30 Set all 32 RABs at 02 with number 1 priority 1 1 46 Set dial 9 to function 101 Trunk Group 1 1 1 81 4s 1 8 08 Page 3 LK4 LCR Bypass Trunk Groups 2 32 to Allow Page4 LK1 LCR Recall...

Page 766: ...2 MultiQuest AT T Group 04 to 02 Tie Nortel Group 05 to 02 FX Nortel Group 06 to 01 ACCUNET AT T Future Group 07 to 03 OUTWATS Nortel Group 08 16 to 99 default 1 10 21 Group 01 to 10 MEGACOM AT T Group 02 to 05 MEGACOM800 AT T Group 03 to 02 MultiQuest AT T Group 04 to 03 Tie Nortel Group 05 to 03 FX Nortel Group 06 to 01 ACCUNET AT T Future Group 07 to 03 OUTWATS Nortel Group 08 16 to 99 default ...

Page 767: ...cess Code I The KSU generates an LCR Dial Tone The Terminal LCD shows LCR Table 3 3 Memory Block Data R A B TN 02 NPI 03 TNI 00 NIP 01 NID 04 FCVS 1 10 05 FCVF 06 SP 07 MAX DIGIT 08 SFG 09 Values in are the last two digits of Call by Call Memory Blocks e g 1 10 0X 01 2 1 None None None 03 AT T 00 0 00 0 11 01 02 4 1 None None None 03 AT T 00 0 00 0 10 01 03 2 1 2 1 0288 03 AT T 00 0 00 0 11 01 04 ...

Page 768: ...CD shows 12127527000 SETUP is sent to the Network SETUP Message 6 PRT is connected LEDs remain On Conversation starts 7 The Terminal LCD displays the elapsed time for the call 3 7 2 Dial 9 Trunk access code 214 222 5000 LCR search sequence Area Code 214 Route Adv 02 Route 02 RAB 02 TG 02 CO 23 Operation 1 Go off hook and listen for ICM dial tone The Terminal LCD shows 100 2 Dial the Trunk Access C...

Page 769: ...tion starts 6 The Terminal LCD displays the elapsed time for the call 3 7 3 Dial 9 1 333 444 5000 LCR search sequence Area Code 333 Route Adv 03 Route 03 RAB 03 TG 02 CO 23 SETUP Message 3 7 4 Dial 9 1 800 777 5000 LCR search sequence Area Code 800 Route Adv 04 Route 04 RAB 04 TG 02 CO 23 SETUP Message CPN NSF RAB TN NPI TNI NIP NID F S FCV Service FCV Feature FCV Service Parameter 02 4 N 1 214 22...

Page 770: ...h sequence LCR Dial Route Adv 01 Route 01 first priority RAB 01 SFG 01 Outgoing SFG 08 overflow Route 040 2nd priority TG 03 CO 32 SETUP Message 3 7 8 Outgoing FX service Dial 9 1 500 222 3333 LCR search sequence Area Code 555 Route Adv 07 Route 07 RAB 07 TG 02 CO 23 SETUP Message CPN NSF RAB TN NPI TNI NIP NID F S FCV Service FCV Feature FCV Service Parameter 05 2 N 1 913 381 6000 None None None ...

Page 771: ...Interval Time Selection 4 sec default from the last digit expires When a digit is not dialed after seizure of the external line before the interdigit interval times out the external line is released and a Busy Tone is generated H When Call forward Off premise is assigned MB 4 47 ISDN Directory Number Selection follows the specification at the TEL to which the call is forwarded H No tandem connecti...

Page 772: ...ng call Day Night Ring using Memory Block 4 01 CO PBX Ring Assignment Day Mode Memory Block 4 02 CO PBX Ring Assignment Night Mode or DIT ANA using Memory Block 3 61 DIT ANA Delay Answer Time Selection must be set for all COs H CBC parameters can be set to all assigned values When an unused value is set outgoing calls may not process properly H The Type of Network ID TNI Network ID Plan NIP and Ne...

Page 773: ...ll has priority A collision error between simultaneous SETUP messages is generated and the outgoing call gets a busy signal H The Incoming outgoing IC OG SFG must be equal to or greater than the outgoing OG SFG When not In many cases the Electra Elite system does not accept an incoming call H When Operator Call Time Out Table is set to 0 in LCR Programming the operator call requiring more than 1 d...

Page 774: ...y Call incoming calls are terminated Incoming Incoming Reject 88 Incompatible Destination Call Type SFG MB 1 10 01 08 CBC MB 1 13 03 Voice Others CBC Call Termination Flowchart Yes No Trunk Type MB 3 91 Called Party Number CPN DID Incoming Type MB 1 10 22 Data Match No Match DID DIT ANA Assigned MB 3 42 3 43 No Software selects SFG 16 Yes Digit Add Del for Tie Line Networking MB 5 00 Normal Incomi...

Page 775: ...a traffic 4 2 Memory Block Descriptions Auto Negotiation Yes No Selection Memory Block 1 16 00 Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not Auto Negotiation is enabled for each port of the HUB 8 U ETU When No is selected Memory Block 1 16 01 Port Speed Selection 10 100 Base T and Memory Block 1 16 02 Port Duplex Mode Selection are used When equipment with auto negotiation function is connected ...

Page 776: ...6 Use this memory block to specify how frames reaching the ingress port without VLAN tags are marked for queuing internally in the HUB 8 The HUB 8 has two queues High Priority and Low Priority When the frame reaches the egress port settings for Memory Blocks 1 16 08 for High Priority frames and 1 16 09 for Low Priority frames for the egress port are used to convert the low or high priority queue t...

Page 777: ...the same VLAN s Mirroring Target Port Assignment Memory Block 1 16 12 When Port Mirroring is enabled in Memory Block 1 16 10 Port Mirroring Selection use this Memory Block to specify a target port that monitors frames transmitted on the source port specified by Memory Block 1 16 11 Mirroring Source Port Assignment for each HUB 8 U ETU The source port and target port must be in the same VLAN s VLAN...

Page 778: ... of giving priority to time sensitive network voice or video traffic Diffserv and another router based queuing method layer 3 of the OSI model do not solve the problem of network congestion on the LAN Networks for voice and video should use switching hubs instead of dumb hubs The HUB 8 ETU is a layer 2 switch that supports the IEEE 802 1p standard for QoS for IEEE 802 1q standard VLANs VLANs may b...

Page 779: ...ities The IEEE 802 1q VLANs insert a 4 byte tag in the Ethernet frame that includes both the VLAN Identifier 1 4095 and the user_priority 0 7 field that is used to assign traffic to a priority queue The HUB 8 has high and low priority queues With Memory Block 1 16 06 set to NO default Memory Block 1 16 07 is used to determine which queue a frame is assigned based on the frame IEEE 802 1p priority ...

Page 780: ...ffic is generally set for a priority of 0 Programming MB 1 16 04 VLAN Mode Selection YS MB 1 16 05 Default VLAN IDTag Insertion Refer to Table 1 MB 1 16 06 Port Based Priority Selection Refer to Table 3 MB 1 16 07 High Priority RX Tag Threshold Refer to Table 3 MB 1 16 08 High Priority TX Tag Assignment Refer to Table 3 MB 1 16 09 Low Priority TX Tag Assignment Refer to Table 3 MB 1 16 13 VLAN Gro...

Page 781: ...rt 1 is attached to an IP telephone with a PC port set for VLAN 200 H Port 2 Not Used H Port 3 PC requires default VLAN ID setting of 200 because it may not be able to tag traffic H Ports 4 and 6 VoIP cards without native ability to tag traffic H Port 8 Ethernet switch with native VLAN tagging abilities enabled Figure 3 3 Physical Layout and Default VLAN IDs MB 1 16 05 Default VLAN ID Tag Insertio...

Page 782: ... VLAN 100 and VLAN 200 must be permitted to go through port 1 VLAN tags should be inserted for each H Port 2 Not Used H Port 3 PC is a member of VLAN 200 but does not support VLAN tag insertion The PC does not respond to VLAN tagged traffic H Port 4 MG 8 ETU Elite VoIP ETU that does not support VLAN tags on VLAN 100 H Port 5 IP terminal with VLAN tagging support on VLAN 100 H Port 6 IPC ETU ELite ...

Page 783: ...5 and the PC is configured for priority 0 H Port 2 Not Used H Port 3 The PC does not support VLAN tagging so port based priority could be used H Port 4 Traffic from the MG 8 is set for High Priority queue in MB 1 16 06 H Port 5 In IP terminal programming the IP terminal is configured for priority 5 H Port 6 Traffic from the IPC is set for High Priority queue in MB 1 16 06 H Port 7 In IP terminal p...

Page 784: ...U in MB 1 16 07 is priority 4 Priority 0 3 traffic from the Ethernet Switch goes to the Low Priority queue of the HUB 8 and priority 4 7 goes to the High Priority queue For traffic from ports configured for port based priority that exit port 1 the Low Priority queue traffic is marked priority 0 and the High Priority queue traffic from the MG 8 on port 4 and the IPC on port 6 is marked priority 4 T...

Page 785: ..._____________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ Document Revision 4 Electra Elite IPK THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 786: ... Time when no signal is being sent to a CO PBX line 1 0s 3 0s 3 0s DP Interdigit Time Selection 1 1 01 Minimum time between dialing signals in Dial Pulse dialing A B B Hookflash Time Selection 1 1 02 Timing of a CO PBX hookflash from the Recall key of a Multiline Terminal or a Single Line Telephone to the CO PBX line 20ms 600ms 5 0s Hold Recall Time Selection Non Exclusive Hold 1 1 03 The time bef...

Page 787: ...imit 45s 060s 999s Trunk Queuing Timeout Selection 1 1 37 The time a station with Trunk Queue set rings before the queue is automatically canceled 10s 00s No Limit 10s 10s 60s 99s CO PBX Prepause Time Selection 1 1 57 The time before dialed digits are sent over a CO PBX line after the line is seized NON 1s 13s Hold Recall Time Selection Exclusive 1 1 63 The time minutes for Exclusive Hold Recall N...

Page 788: ...s 00m No Limit 30m 30m 30m 99m Call Forward No Answer Time Selection 1 2 22 The time before ICM or Trunk calls are forwarded when there is no answer 4s 01s 12s 12s 60s 99s System Call Park Recall Time Selection 1 2 23 Time minutes before a parked call recalls to the station that parked the call 0 5 001s 1 0 060s 10 0 999s Delayed Ringing Time Assignment ICM 1 2 26 The delayed ringing time on incom...

Page 789: ...10 The DTMF duration interdigit time milliseconds for voice mail 60 70 110 80 810 190 Tandem Transfer Automatic Disconnect Time Selection 1 4 00 The maximum time minutes before the system automatic disconnects a Trunk to Trunk connection 000 060 999 Automated Attendant First Digit PBR Release Time Selection 1 4 01 The time a PBR circuit remains connected after the Automated Attendant message is pl...

Page 790: ...one Display Time Selection 1 7 01 The time a doorphone call signals a station before it times out 10s 01s 10s 10s 90s 99s External Paging Timeout Selection 1 7 06 The time minutes before an external paging is automatically disconnected 0 5 000s No Limit 5 0 300s 999s External Speaker Chime Start Time Selection 1 7 09 The delay time milliseconds between when an external paging code is dialed and wh...

Page 791: ...Selection 3 17 The time milliseconds between when the receiving system answers and the time when it is recognized as an answer 0 520 1950 Tie Line Release Detect Time Selection 3 18 The time milliseconds between when the circuit disconnection is detected on the Tie line on the distant system side and when it is recognized as Tie Line Release 0 520 1950 Tie Line CO PBX Incoming Signal Detect Time S...

Page 792: ... The maximum time for receiving an acknowledgment signal from a distant system before sending a busy tone 1s 7s Disconnect Recognition Time Selection 3 33 The minimum time seconds before a disconnected circuit can be accessed again 0 0 3 1 5 Automatic Release Signal Detection Selection 3 40 The Signal detection time milliseconds for CO PBX line release after a disconnect signal is received from th...

Page 793: ...____________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ Document Revision 4 Electra Elite IPK THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 794: ... Characters can be entered using the dial pad instead of the Character Code Tables Refer to 1 2 Dial Pad Character Assignment Codes 166 221 and 250 252 are used for Japanese characters only Character Code Character Code Character Code BLANK 032 064 096 033 A 065 a 097 034 B 066 b 098 035 C 067 c 099 036 D 068 d 100 037 E 069 e 101 038 F 070 f 102 039 G 071 g 103 040 H 072 h 104 041 I 073 i 105 042...

Page 795: ...____________________________________________________________________ Document Revision 4 Electra Elite IPK 5 053 U 085 u 117 6 054 V 086 v 118 7 055 W 087 w 119 8 056 X 088 x 120 9 057 Y 089 y 121 058 Z 090 z 122 059 091 123 060 092 124 061 093 125 062 094 Æ 126 063 _ 095 127 Character Code Character Code Character Code ...

Page 796: ... IPK Document Revision 4 Programming Manual B 3 ___________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ ...

Page 797: ...xample 1 Enter Program Mode Display shows PROGRAM MODE 2 Press LK3 Display shows 01 _ 3 Press LK2 Display still shows 01 _ 4 Press KK Display shows 01 N_ Table B 1 System Data Input Press 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Redial 1st 1 A D G J M P T W 0 2nd B E H K N Q U X 3rd C F I L O R V Y 4th a d g j m S t Z 5th b e h k n p u w 6th c f i l o q v x 7th 2 3 4 5 6 r 8 y 8th To A To D To G To J To M s To T z 9th...

Page 798: ...ws 01 02 OUT IN 1 2 2 Enter Speed Dial Name 1 Press inactive A Display is blank 2 Press B Display shows _ 3 Press KK Display shows 00 _ 4 Press I Display shows 00 0 _ Table B 2 Speed Dial Name Input Press 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1st 1 A D G J M P T W 0 Space 2nd B E H K N Q U X 3rd C F I L O R V Y 4th a d g j m S t Z 5th b e h k n p u w 6th c f i l o q v x 7th 2 3 4 5 6 r 8 y 8th To A To D To G To J T...

Page 799: ...____________________________________________________ Document Revision 4 Electra Elite IPK 5 Press ABCDE Display shows 00 0 12345_ 6 Press H Display shows 00 _ 7 Press FF Display shows 00 N_ 8 Press CC Display shows 00 NE_ 9 Press BBB Display shows 00 NEC_ 10 Press B Display shows 00 NECA_ 11 Press F Display shows 00 NECAM_ 12 Press A ...

Page 800: ...l DGT Digit ALM Alarm DISP Display ANS Answer DISTM Disconnection Recognition Time ANSWR Answer DIVERT Diversion ASSGN Assignment DLY Delay Signal Time AUT Automatic DP Dial Pulse AUTANS Autoanswer DSS Direct Station Selection BLANK Service Class DY Day Mode BNCE Bounce FLSH Flash BTN Button GUARD Outgoing Guard Time CAL Call H High CANCLD Canceled HR Hour CKT Circuit ICM Intercom Extension CNF Co...

Page 801: ...ld RINGTONE Ringing Tone MSTR Master RCVR Receiver NUM Number RES Restriction NT Night Mode RLY Relay OUT Outgoing RNGTONE Ringing Tone OG TM Outgoing Time OUt Assignment RT Route OV Over RT ADV Route Advance Block PAD AT PAD Pattern A Transmission Assignment RVS Reversal PAD AR PAD Pattern A Receiving Assignment SDT Second Dial Tone Assignment PAD BT PAD Pattern B Transmission Assignment SEND Tra...

Page 802: ...PROGRAMMING MANUAL NEC Unified Solutions Inc Document Revision 4 Release 4000 4500 ...

Page 803: ......

Search results

Summary of Contents for ElectraElite IPK

Reviews:

Brands by name

Popular brands

NEC ElectraElite IPK, Programming Manual

Search results

Summary of Contents for ElectraElite IPK

Reviews:

Brands by name

Popular brands